JP2016032569A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characteristic with a performance means.SOLUTION: There are provided a first storage area M1 storing first release information and a second storage area M2 storing second release information. A CPU of a sub control unit acquires the second release information from an inputted password and stores it to the second storage area M2. The CPU of the sub control unit can update the first release information stored to the first storage area M1 and the second release information stored to the second storage area M2. The CPU of the sub control unit designates one or more kinds of music among many kinds of music in correspondence with at least either the first release information or the second release information. A speaker can at least perform voice output by one or more kinds of designated music.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known which are provided with directing means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a production means.

The first game stand of the present invention that solves the above-mentioned object is
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
First storage means capable of storing at least first information;
First information updating means capable of at least updating the first information stored in the first storage means;
An input means capable of inputting conversion information;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring at least second information from the input conversion information;
Second storage means capable of storing at least the second information acquired by the acquisition means;
Second information update means capable of at least updating the second information stored in the second storage means;
Corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information, designation means capable of designating one or a plurality of types of effects among the plurality of types of effects;
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one or more kinds of effects designated by the designation means.
It is characterized by that.

The second game stand of the present invention that solves the above object is as follows.
Operating means;
Display means;
Storage means;
A game machine equipped with
The storage means is means capable of storing at least first information;
The storage means is means capable of storing at least second information,
The first information is information based on first input information,
The second information is information based on second input information,
The first input information is information output from a real-time clock,
The second input information is information input by operation of the operation means,
The display means is means capable of executing at least display according to information stored in the storage means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the production means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400, (c) is 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a figure explaining the concept of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the concept of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the production | presentation which can be selected, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed when selecting the content of production, (c) These are figures explaining the character image displayed during a pattern change, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed when music is selected. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process in the pachinko machine 100 concerning 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. It is a table | surface which shows the specification of the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) of 2nd Embodiment, and the specification of the other kind of pachinko machine (game table B). (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400, (c) is 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a figure for demonstrating an original mode. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 1, (i) is a figure which shows the screen displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 when "member registration" is selected, (Ii) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “input password” is selected. (I) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “2D code issuance” is selected, and (ii) is a decorative symbol when “data clear” is selected. It is a figure which shows the screen displayed on the display apparatus 208, (iii) is a figure which shows the screen displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 when "end" is selected. (A) is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the mission prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the mission achievement status table memorize | stored in RAM408 of the 1st sub-control part 400. FIG. It is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the customization related page prepared for the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an original mode control process (step S321). It is a figure which shows the flow of a server control process. Mission No. No. 9 was achieved and no. It is the figure which showed the method of acquiring 22 standby images. It is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the mission in a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the mission in a 2nd modification. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the exchange of the password in a 3rd modification, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the password in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the password production | generation process in the game machine D of the new series shown to Fig.29 (a). 18A is an external perspective view of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18 viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 18B is a table showing settings in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. is there. It is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the mission applied between game machines with which game media differ. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of production control processing. It is the figure which showed an example of the original mode specification table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a mission achievement determination process. It is the figure which showed an example of the mission specification table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an original mode control process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the menu screen transition. It is the figure which showed an example of identification information. It is the figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the electric power interruption / recovery process 1. FIG. It is the figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the power interruption / recovery process 2. FIG. It is the figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the electric power interruption / recovery process 3. FIG. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine. It is the figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the power interruption / recovery process 4. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the production table. It is the figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the power interruption / recovery process 5. FIG. It is the figure which showed the structural example of the game system. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the server control process which a management server performs. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. An effect button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance return instruction to the card unit And a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 190 is also provided. In the present embodiment, for example, a player can input conversion information such as a password by operating the operation key unit 190. That is, in this embodiment, the operation key unit 190 functions as an input unit that can input conversion information. Further, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the operation key unit 190, an effect to be executed can be instructed from one or more types of effects permitted to be executed as described later. Yes. That is, the operation key unit 190, together with the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 to be described later, functions as an instruction unit that can instruct the player to perform at least an effect to be executed from one or more types of effects specified by the specifying unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set an original (Daitomo) mode. The first sub-board 160 is provided with an original mode selection switch 161 for switching between enabling and disabling the original mode. The original mode selection switch 161 is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or operated by a store clerk of the store where the pachinko machine is installed. The original mode selection switch 161 shown in FIG. 2 can be operated by a store clerk at a pachinko machine store, but the portion of the first sub-board 160 where the original mode selection switch 161 is provided is caulked at the time of shipment. The original mode selection switch 161 may be disabled after shipment. That is, since the original mode selection switch 161 cannot be operated by the player, it is preferably configured so that only a limited number of people such as a manufacturer or a store clerk can operate.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player. There are ball game machines (pachinko machines) and revolving game machines (slot machines) with different game formats, and game machines with different models and series (for example, appear) There are also game machines with different main characters. The specifications here mean different types of so-called MAX machines, sweet digital machines, etc., which have the same game format and the same model or series, but have different jackpot probabilities. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a MAX machine.

  Examples of game consoles with different specifications in the same series include those with common frame and board designs, but different designs, and a common image character and world view on the LCD. Can do. In addition, game machines with different specifications in the same series often have the same development period, so it is common to use the same image as a decorative design or audio data that is played back at a specific opportunity such as during a big hit. Is.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the high accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like. ing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and an original mode selection switch shown in FIG. 161 (dip switch) is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 408 includes a first storage area and a second storage area for determining the contents of the effect. The first storage area and the second storage area may be configured on the same device or may be configured on different devices.

  The first storage area is a storage area that can store the first information. Specifically, the game history in the pachinko machine 100 and various information based on the game history (for example, based on the game history) (Numerical information such as an acquired value in which generated numerical values are added and accumulated), date / time information from the RTC 438 described later, mission achievement status described later, and the like can be stored as the first information. That is, the RAM 408 having the first storage area functions as a first storage unit. In the following description, the first storage area may be referred to as a pachinko machine main body storage area. The game history includes, for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of times of reach production, the number of times of execution of a predetermined super reach production, the number of jackpots, the number of times that the probability change state has occurred, the number of consecutive games, and the like. The first information is configured to be appropriately updated under the control of the CPU 404 in accordance with the update of the game history, the achievement of the mission, the transmission of date / time information from the RTC 438, or the like. That is, the CPU 404 functions as a first information update unit that can update at least the first information stored in the first storage unit. Also, for example, in updating numerical information, when an event such as the start of symbol fluctuation, the occurrence of reach or super reach, the start of jackpot, the entry into the probability change state, etc., the event that occurred is digitized, This is done by adding and updating. It should be noted that the event for which the numerical information is added and updated may be a part of the above-described events or all of the events. For example, the first information is cleared when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. However, the first information may be stored and held without being cleared from the shipment of the pachinko machine 100. Further, the first information may be configured to be cleared when a predetermined time elapses after the player no longer plays the game (for example, 10 minutes elapse without the symbol variation display). The player can be cleared by a clearing operation or the like using the operation key unit 190 by the player.

  The second storage area is a storage area capable of storing the second information. Specifically, the game history in the pachinko machine 100 and various information based on the game history (for example, based on the game history). Numerical information such as an acquired value obtained by adding and storing generated numerical values), a mission achievement status described later, and the like can be stored as second information. That is, the RAM 408 provided with the second storage area functions as a second storage unit. In the following description, the second storage area may be referred to as a player individual storage area. The game history includes, for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of times of reach production, the number of times of execution of a predetermined super reach production, the number of jackpots, the number of times that the probability change state has occurred, the number of consecutive games, and the like. The second information is configured so that it can be appropriately updated under the control of the CPU 404 according to the update of the game history, the achievement of the mission, and the like. That is, the CPU 404 functions as a second information update unit that can update at least the second information stored in the second storage unit. Also, for example, in updating numerical information, when an event such as the start of symbol fluctuation, the occurrence of reach or super reach, the start of jackpot, the entry into the probability change state, etc., the event that occurred is digitized, This is done by adding and updating. It should be noted that the event for which the numerical information is added and updated may be a part of the above-described events or all of the events. The second information is, for example, information that can be obtained by the CPU 404 decrypting the password (conversion information) input by the operation key unit 190 described above. That is, the CPU 404 functions as an acquisition unit that can acquire at least the second information from the input conversion information. The second information is cleared by a predetermined clear process by the CPU 404 when a password is issued as will be described later, for example. That is, the CPU 404 functions as an information clear unit that can clear at least the second information stored in the second storage unit when the conversion information is output by the output unit. The second information may be configured not to be cleared even when a password is issued. Further, the second information may be configured to be cleared when a predetermined time elapses after the player no longer plays the game (for example, 10 minutes elapse without the symbol variation display). The player can be cleared by a clearing operation or the like using the operation key unit 190 by the player.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. The circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the effect button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 1, and the operation that detects the operation of the operation key unit 190 The key unit sensor 425 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an RTC (Real Time Clock) 438 is connected to the basic circuit 402 by a signal line. The RTC 438 measures the time to indicate the current “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”, and outputs the result to the basic circuit 402 as a signal. To do. This signal may be referred to as first input information. In the basic circuit 402, for example, the CPU 404 has a signal line from the RTC 438 at a predetermined timing (for example, in the initial setting (step S301) executed in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8 and described later). A process of acquiring a signal from the RTC 438 is performed with reference to the connected input port, and a process of generating date and time information is performed based on the signal obtained by this process. This date / time information is configured to be stored in the first storage area of the RAM 408 as the first information. Note that the CPU 404 may acquire a signal from the RTC 438 with reference to the input port only at a predetermined timing after power-on, for example. According to such a configuration, the CPU 404 does not refer to the input port even when there is a change in the signal from the RTC 438 based on, for example, the date being changed. The stored first information is not changed, and as a result, it may be possible not to change the contents of selectable effects (details will be described later). On the other hand, the second information stored in the second storage area is configured to be changed each time a password is input, for example. Therefore, the contents of the selectable effects are changed each time. The RTC 438 is configured by an external device connected to the basic circuit 402. However, the RTC 438 may be configured to be mounted on the basic circuit 402 or may be configured to be embedded in the CPU 404. Good.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and the 15th round is defined as one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure shifts to a low probability state, and if the special figure A, special figure C, and special figure E are won, the special figure will be displayed until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. A high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a special figure probability change, and a state where the probability of winning a big jackpot after the jackpot game ends (a special figure high probability state) is a player. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when special figure A and special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed. When the special figure B and the special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is finished, and the non-electric support state is displayed at the 101st time. Transition to (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is the second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  As described above, in the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 performs one or more opening / closing operations, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure J is the second lost symbol. When the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol other than “special symbol I” and “special symbol J” (for example, a third losing symbol or the like) may be prepared. In this embodiment, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high, and the second advantage. A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of a hit control state (special game state) and a lose control state (normal game state). . The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (normal game state).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “special symbol A” are prepared as the jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notification means for notifying the result of the determination (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of the symbol display means for displaying the symbol variation until the special symbols A to J) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, or “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R big jackpot, “decorative symbol combination 1” in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (For example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. Also, when “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special big hit, is notified, “Decorated Pattern Combination 2” (for example, “Decoration 3-3”, in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (Decoration 3 -decoration 3 "," decoration 7 -decoration 7 -decoration 7 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when three identical even-numbered decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, etc.), only the combination of these ornamental symbols is seen. Then, it is unclear whether you won the 15R special jackpot with probability change or the 15R jackpot without probability change. In the case of notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” that are small hits, the symbol display area 208a. ˜208c, “decoration pattern combination 3” such as “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and “special drawing C” that is suddenly probable or “special drawing D” that is suddenly shortened is notified. In this case, “decorative symbol combination 4” such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” that are lost, decorative symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1” to “decorative symbol combination 4” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (for example, loose eye) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this “decorative symbol variable display” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped are displayed. Sometimes referred to as symbol variation display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 5A) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 10B) is larger in the design (see FIG. 10B).

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the normal diagram” to the stop display of the stop symbol pattern of the normal diagram may be referred to as a normal diagram of variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores a special figure hold number, a special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display design update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Various timers including a special figure display symbol update timer, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. Although details of the winning acceptance process will be described later, in the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. In this special figure prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been an increase in the special chart start information, that is, whether or not the special chart start information has been added to the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308. If it is added (if added), the stop symbol of the special figure is prefetched with reference to the start information of the increased special figure. That is, according to the timing at which the start information storage unit stores the start information, the start information is pre-read from the start information storage unit, and will be performed in the future. The determination result in step S231 and the symbols to be stopped are derived in advance based on the pre-read start information. Here, prefetching is performed using the determination table based on whether or not the current control state is a state with special figure probability change. That is, the stop symbol of the special figure is prefetched in the same manner as the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. More specifically, when a win / no-go determination is made in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), a specific win / fail determination result (for example, the determination result of the jackpot symbol 1) ) Is preliminarily determined based on start-up information pre-read before performing the determination. Next, stop symbol information representing the stop symbol of the pre-read special symbol is stored in a predetermined area (pre-fetch result storage unit) of the RAM 308. Note that here, whether or not a special figure is determined and stopped is preliminarily determined based on the pre-read start information. However, whether or not a special figure is determined and whether or not a stop symbol is separately determined also in the special figure related lottery process. On the other hand, if the special chart start information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S225 without prefetching the special chart start information.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the following description, the first small hit and the second small hit are simply referred to as small hits without any particular distinction, and the first and second loses are simply referred to as loses without any particular distinction. is there. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5A are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the ordinary probability variation flag is on. In the case, the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, The special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, Special figure probability fluctuation flag is on , Special figure F when the common figure probability variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, first loss flag The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second loss flag are turned on, respectively. Then, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal design (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first lose symbol (special I) ) And the second lost symbol (special symbol J).

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game having a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game having a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence / absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence / absence of a front frame door open error or the presence / absence of a full pan error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S311, when the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the drive circuit 422 of the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read out in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in S309, the control command is set in the transmission area (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Before describing the features of the present invention, the concept of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the concept of the present invention.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the storage state and the display state of the storage area before login, during login, and after logout by the player. For example, after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, This represents a state in which a player's password is entered and logged in from a state before login by inputting the player's password, and then a password is issued and logged out.

  As shown in FIG. 9A-1, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, for example, “1A” as the first information is stored in the first storage area in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Is stored. The data stored in the first storage area is updated as described above. At this time, clear data is stored in the second storage area of the RAM 408. That is, FIG. 9A-1 shows a state before login. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first display corresponding to the data (1A) stored in the first storage area is performed. As the first display, for example, a background display or a character display may be used, or a moving image or a still image may be used. In addition, here, the display by the display means is given as an example of the effect, but an effect by voice output or blinking by a lamp may be used. Moreover, the effect by the combination of 1 or 2 or more of a display, an audio | voice, and a lamp | ramp may be sufficient.

  Subsequently, when the password is input by the player as described above, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 decrypts the password and stores it in the second storage area in the RAM 408 as shown in FIG. 9 (a-2). For example, data “2A” as second information obtained by decoding is stored. On the other hand, “1A” as the first information is continuously stored in the first storage area. That is, FIG. 9A-2 shows a state after login. The decorative symbol display device 208 performs a second display corresponding to the data (1A) stored in the first storage area and the data (2A) stored in the second storage area. Yes. The second display may be, for example, a background display or a character display, or a moving image or a still image. In addition, here, the display by the display means is given as an example of the effect, but an effect by voice output or blinking by a lamp may be used. Moreover, the effect by the combination of 1 or 2 or more of a display, an audio | voice, and a lamp | ramp may be sufficient. Here, the second display may be displayed based on both data of 1A as the first information and 2A as the second information, or 1A as the first information. Of the second information 2A, information including more advantageous information may be adopted and displayed based on the information. For example, the data (1A) is data indicating that the execution of the effects A and the effects B is enabled (allowed), and the data (2A) enables the execution of the effects A, effects B, and effects C. If the data indicates that the data (1A) is not employed, the data (2A) may be employed and the presentation may be executed based on the data (2A). Further, for example, the data (1A) is data indicating that the execution of the effects A and the effects C is possible (allowed), and the data (2A) enables the execution of the effects A and the effects D. In the case of the data indicating the data, both the data (1A) and the data (2A) may be adopted, and the effects A, effects C, and effects D may be executed based on the data (1A) and the data (2A). The first information is information for enabling execution with respect to the first effect content (for example, the type of music used in BGM), and the second information is the second effect content (for example, appearance) Information for enabling execution with respect to the character type).

  Thereafter, in the pachinko machine 100, when the above-described event occurs or the mission is achieved, the first information is updated from “1A” to “1B” as shown in FIG. 9A-3. In addition, the second information is updated from “2A” to “2B”. The update conditions for the first information and the second information may be the same or different. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a third display corresponding to the data (1B) stored in the first storage area and the data (2B) stored in the second storage area. Yes. As the third display, for example, a background display or a character display may be used, or a moving image or a still image may be used. In addition, here, the display by the display means is given as an example of the effect, but an effect by voice output or blinking by a lamp may be used. Moreover, the effect by the combination of 1 or 2 or more of a display, an audio | voice, and a lamp | ramp may be sufficient.

  When the player operates the operation key unit 190 to issue a password, the CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400 creates a password based on the second information stored in the second storage area, This is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9A-4, the clear data is stored in the second storage area of the RAM 408. On the other hand, “1B” as the first information is continuously stored in the first storage area. That is, FIG. 9A-4 shows a state after logout. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a fourth display corresponding to the data (1B) stored in the first storage area. As the fourth display, for example, a background display or a character display may be used, or a moving image or a still image may be used. In addition, here, the display by the display means is given as an example of the effect, but an effect by voice output or blinking by a lamp may be used. Moreover, the effect by the combination of 1 or 2 or more of a display, an audio | voice, and a lamp | ramp may be sufficient.

  The first display to the fourth display may have different contents, some of them may have the same contents, or all of them may have the same contents. Further, the information stored in the first storage area may be updated from initial information such as clear data set when the power is turned on, or updated from information obtained by inputting a password. It may be done. The information stored in the second storage area may be updated from information obtained by inputting a password, or updated from initial information such as clear data set at power-on. It may be a thing.

  As described above, in FIG. 9A, the execution is possible based on the first information stored in the first storage area provided in the RAM 408 and the second information stored in the second storage area. It can be said that the concept of designating specific production contents is shown.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining a display example when the display content is switched, and FIG. 9B-1 shows the display state of the Nth display in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 9B-2 shows the display state of the (N + 1) th display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the (N + 1) th display is a display performed after the Nth display.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9B-1, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a first image and a second image. The first image is, for example, a background display, and the second image is, for example, a character image. Both the first image and the second image are arbitrary images. Here, an image will be described as an example of an effect, but it goes without saying that the present invention can also be applied to an effect produced by outputting sound or blinking a lamp.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9B-2, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a third image is displayed instead of the second image. On the other hand, the first image is continuously displayed from the Nth display. The third image may be an image completely different from the second image, may be an image in which a part of the second image is changed, or may be an image of the second image. Some of the images may be the same.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the storage area. Specifically, the information stored in the first storage area in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second storage area The information stored in is schematically represented. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, the first storage information (first information) is stored in the first storage area, and the second storage information (second storage) is stored in the second storage area. Information) is stored.

  FIGS. 9D to 9F show any storage when the first storage information is stored in the first storage area and the second storage information is stored in the second storage area. It is a figure for demonstrating whether the production which can be performed based on information is determined (designated).

  FIG. 9D shows that an effect that can be executed is determined based on the second storage information without using the first storage information. In addition, you may make it determine the production | presentation which can be performed based on 1st memory information, without using 2nd memory information.

  FIG. 9 (e) shows that the storage information to be used is selected from the first storage information and the second storage information, and an effect that can be executed is determined based on the selected storage information. Yes. For example, an effect that can be executed based on the second storage information (first storage information) rather than an effect that can be executed based on the first storage information (second storage information). This is a case that is applied to a case where an effect that can be executed by using the second storage information (first storage information) preferentially is determined when there are more cases.

  FIG. 9F shows that an effect that can be executed is determined based on the first storage information and the second storage information. For example, when the effect that can be executed based on the first stored information is different from the effect that can be executed based on the second stored information, the first stored information and the first stored information This is a case applied to a case where an effect that can be executed is determined based on at least one of the second stored information. Specifically, the music that can be used as BGM is determined based on the first storage information, and the character image that appears is determined based on the second storage information.

  In a conventional gaming machine, what is performed based on one stored information (memory information for determining an executable effect) is determined in order to determine an executable effect among a plurality of types of effects. Are known. In such a gaming machine, when a player inputs a password and logs in, advantageous storage information that increases the types of effects that can be executed is stored. When moving to another pachinko machine, advantageous memory information remains in the pachinko machine that has been playing until now. Then, after that, other players who try to play with the pachinko machine may have fewer executable performances with their own passwords. In such a situation, other players Does not bother to enter his password and play. Therefore, the pachinko machine that attempts to increase the types of effects that can be executed by performing many games is impaired, and the interest of the game may be reduced. This becomes conspicuous when a so-called crab walk is performed in which the player repeats the table movement while logging in.

  On the other hand, if the memorized memorized information is cleared, the types of effects that can be executed are in the initial state, and can be executed according to the game history accumulated in the pachinko machine. If there is a function to increase the number of types of productions, there are few types of productions that can be performed by a player who does not log in, and this results in a decrease in game motivation. There is a case to be.

  According to the present invention, by providing at least a plurality of storage areas, it may be possible to solve the above-described problems of conventional gaming machines and prevent a decrease in gaming motivation.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the concept of the present invention. FIG. 10A shows an acquired value that is an example of first storage information (first information) and an effect that can be executed. While showing the relationship with release information, the relationship between the acquired value which is an example of 2nd memory | storage information (2nd information) and the release information which shows the production | presentation which can be performed is shown. Here, the acquired value is an example of numerical information that is added and updated each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the event described above occurs).

  The concept shown in FIG. 10A is executable (released) every time the acquired value stored in the first storage area reaches a threshold value defined for each type of effect, for example. ) Increase production. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10A, according to the current acquired value in the first storage information, the threshold value for releasing the first effect and the second effect is exceeded. The production and the second production are executable. Furthermore, when the acquired value is added to reach a value for releasing the third effect, the third effect can be executed in addition to the first effect and the second effect. The acquired value stored in the second storage area is also added and updated in the same manner, and the effects that can be executed are increased according to the updated acquired value. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, for example, as first storage information (second storage information), information (release information) indicating the type of effect that can be executed together with the acquired value is first. May be stored in the storage area (second storage area). Further, each threshold value set for the acquired value stored in the first storage area and each threshold value set for the acquired value stored in the second storage area are the same. Alternatively, some or all of them may be different. Also, the type of effect that can be executed from the acquired value stored in the first storage area and the type of effect that can be executed from the acquired value stored in the second storage area are the same. It may be present, or part or all may be different.

  The concept shown in FIG. 10B represents that the types of effects that can be executed according to the acquired value are sequentially released according to a predetermined order. For example, when the acquired value reaches the threshold value a, information indicating that the first effect has been released is stored in the release information, and is added to the effect that can execute the first effect. When the acquired value reaches a threshold value b larger than the threshold value a, information indicating that the second effect is released is stored in the release information, and is added to the effect that can execute the second effect.

  The concept shown in FIG. 10C represents that the types of effects that can be executed in accordance with the acquired value are configured to be released at random. For example, when the acquired value reaches the threshold value a, information indicating that the seventh effect is released is stored in the release information, and is added to the effect that can execute the seventh effect. When the acquired value reaches the threshold value b, information indicating that the second effect has been released is stored in the release information, and is added to the effect that can execute the second effect.

  In the above-described example, for example, certain effects (for example, music used as BGM) are released according to the acquired value, and certain effects (for example, appearing character images) are, for example, missions. It may be released by achieving the above.

  Several embodiments that can be applied to the concept of the invention described above with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 will be described below. It should be noted that the embodiments described below are merely examples included in the concept of the present invention, and it goes without saying that the scope of the invention is not limited thereto.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. Here, the example of the production before the login by the player password input is shown. In the following explanation, a state in which the production proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the losing, is fixedly displayed. Also, any one of the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Are also displayed in the default display mode.

  FIG. 11 also shows the first special figure display device 212, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure display device 214, and the second special figure hold lamp 220. In FIG. 11A, since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol I, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 11A, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol I” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure I” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 11 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol that is stopped and displayed can be recognized. However, in actuality, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol t1 and the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  Further, on the right side of FIG. 11A, the storage states of the first storage area M1 and the second storage area M2 provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 are shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 11A, first release information as first information is stored in the first storage area M1, and second information as second information is stored in the second storage area M1. Second release information is stored. The first release information is information indicating level 1. On the other hand, the second release information is clear information. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 11A is a state before login in which login by a player's password input is not performed. The first release information is updated by, for example, achievement of an event or mission that has occurred in the game.

  In FIG. 11 (b), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 11B has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the colors shown in the circles change into a plurality of types. There is no change in the first release information and the second release information.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 4 is displayed on the first special figure display unit 212. A black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a combination of decoration symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” in a stopped state (determined display), and one special game of variable game is played. finish. Here again, there is no change in the first release information and the second release information.

  When “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. Here again, there is no change in the first release information and the second release information.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined timing during the jackpot game (for example, the first round starts), as shown in FIG. 11 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for selecting a song to be used for BGM in the jackpot game. Is displayed. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a text “Please select a song” to prompt the player to select a song, and a song list ML is displayed on the left side. ing. In the present embodiment, selectable music pieces are determined (designated) based on the first release information and the second release information. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (e), the first release information indicates level 1, and the second release information is clear information, so only one song “Song A” is included in the song list ML. It is displayed as a selectable song. The other music is grayed out without displaying the music name so that it cannot be selected. Selection of music can be performed by operating the operation key unit 190. As described above, in the present embodiment, the 400 CPU 404 of the first sub control unit corresponds to at least one of the first information and the second information, and one or more of a plurality of types of effects. It functions as a designation means that can designate the type of production. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a notifying unit capable of notifying at least one or more types of effects designated by the designation unit.

  Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds while using the music selected by the player as the BGM in the jackpot game. The music is output from the speaker 120 by voice, for example. Then, when the fifteenth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. Here again, there is no change in the first release information and the second release information.

  Then, after the big hit game is finished, for example, the symbol change is performed one or more times in the probability changing state to be transferred thereafter, and the special special symbol A which is the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. When the jackpot game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes a jackpot start effect as shown in FIG. At this time, the first release information stored in the first storage area M1 is updated to information indicating level 2 due to, for example, the occurrence of an event that the probability big hit is started.

  Then, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 11 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for selecting the music to be used in the BGM in the jackpot game as described above. Is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (h), the first release information indicates level 2, and the second release information is clear information. Therefore, in the song list ML, in addition to “Song A”, “Song B "is also displayed as a selectable song. The other music is grayed out without displaying the music name so that it cannot be selected. After that, a big hit game is played with the music selected by the player as BGM.

  In the above-described production example, the BGM used in the jackpot game can be selected. However, the BGM other than the jackpot game may be selected. For example, in the probability change state after the jackpot game. It may be possible to select BGM or BGM in a normal gaming state.

  FIG. 11 (i) is a diagram illustrating an example in which music is selected at a timing other than during the big hit game. The state shown in FIG. 11 (i) is a standby state in which the start of the symbol fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is not suspended and the symbol fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not executed. . FIG. 11I shows a standby state in the probability variation state, for example. Therefore, the first special figure 2 hold display h21 and the second special figure 2 hold display are displayed on the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23 and the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are displayed. The first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all displayed to be blank.

  In such a standby state, for example, when the player performs an operation for performing music selection using the operation key unit 190, the music is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. List ML is displayed. Also in this case, selectable music pieces are determined based on the first release information and the second release information. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (i), the first release information indicates level 2 and the second release information is clear information. Therefore, the song list ML includes “Song A” and “Song B”. Is displayed as a selectable song. The music that can be selected in the big hit game may be different from the music that can be selected in the standby state.

  FIG. 11J is a diagram illustrating another example in which music is selected at a timing other than during the big hit game. The state shown in FIG. 11 (j) is, for example, during the execution of the symbol variation shown in FIG. At this time, since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit. Further, since there are four variable display hold numbers in the special figure 2, four lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 218 are turned on, and correspondingly, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, second The special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all displayed in the default display mode.

  When the player performs an operation for executing music selection by the operation key unit 190 during such a symbol change, as shown in FIG. 11 (j), on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, The music list ML is displayed. Also in this case, selectable music pieces are determined based on the first release information and the second release information. At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (j), the first release information indicates level 2, and the second release information is clear information. Therefore, the song list ML includes “Song A” and “Song B”. Is displayed as a selectable song. Note that the music that can be selected in the big hit game or the standby state and the music that can be selected during the symbol variation may be the same or different.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. Here, an effect example is shown after the login by the player's password input. In the following explanation, a state in which the production proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the losing, is fixedly displayed. At this time, the start of the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 and Special Fig. 2 is not suspended, and the symbol variation of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 is not executed. Further, the timing shown in FIG. 12A is, for example, a standby state in the probability variation state. Therefore, the first special figure 2 hold display h21 and the second special figure are displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 hold display h22, 3rd special figure 2 hold display h23 and 4th special figure 2 hold display h24 are displayed. The first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all displayed to be blank.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol I, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 12A, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol I” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure I” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed.

  Further, on the right side of FIG. 12A, the storage states of the first storage area M1 and the second storage area M2 are shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 12A, the first storage area M1 stores the first release information as the first information, and the second storage area M1 stores the second information as the second information. Second release information is stored. The first release information is information indicating level 2. On the other hand, the second release information is clear information. That is, the state shown in FIG. 12A is a state before login in which login by a player's password input is not performed.

  Thereafter, when a password input mode transition operation is performed by the player's operation key unit 190, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. On the password input screen, for example, a player can input a password as an example of conversion information obtained when logging out in a pachinko machine or slot machine of a different model of the same model or the same series. The password can be input by operating the operation key unit 190. For example, by operating the cross key of the operation key unit 190 while confirming the keyboard image KB displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a desired character can be input. The operation can be realized by repeatedly moving the cursor to and operating the OK button of the operation key unit 190. For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the cursor is expressed by highlighting a frame in which characters are displayed. In the present embodiment, the password is applied as the conversion information. However, other types of information may be used, for example, a barcode or a two-dimensional code. When a configuration for reading a bar code, a two-dimensional code, or the like is adopted, for example, input of conversion information can be realized by providing a reading unit such as a bar code reader.

  When the password input is completed as described above, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 decrypts the input password. Then, the second release information as the second information can be obtained from the decrypted password. At the timing shown in FIG. 12B, for example, second release information indicating level 3 is obtained, and the information is stored in the second storage area M2. There is no change in the first release information, and the first release information remains at level 2. That is, the state shown in FIG. 12B is a state after login after login by the player's password input.

  Thereafter, when the player performs an operation for executing music selection by the operation key unit 190 in the standby state, for example, the music list ML is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Is done. Also in this case, selectable music pieces are determined based on the first release information and the second release information. At the timing shown in FIG. 12C, the first release information indicates level 2, the second release information indicates level 3, and the level of the second release information is higher than the level of the first release information. Therefore, the second release information is applied in preference to the first release information. Therefore, in the music list ML, “Song A”, “Song B”, and “Song C” are displayed as selectable music corresponding to the second release information indicating level 3.

  Thereafter, when the player desires to end the game in the pachinko machine 100, a password obtained by encrypting the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 can be issued. Specifically, in the standby state, for example, when the player performs an operation for ending the game on the operation key unit 190, the decorative symbol display device 208 plays the game as shown in FIG. A confirmation screen for deciding whether to end is displayed. When the player finishes the game, he / she operates the cross key of the operation key unit 190, moves the cursor to the “OK” button, and presses the OK button to indicate the intention to end the game to the pachinko machine 100. Can be done against. Note that, for example, if the player decides to end the game, the cross key of the operation key unit 190 is operated, the cursor is placed on the “Cancel” button, and the OK button is pressed to confirm the screen. And the decorative design display device 208 can display an image that produces a standby state.

  When the “OK” button is pressed as described above, a password is displayed (issued) on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The player can make a note of the issued password and use it as a password to be input when logging in with another pachinko machine or slot machine. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 12E, the second release information is in a state where the level has not changed since the login. Therefore, the issued password may be the same as or different from the password entered at the time of login. When the password is issued, the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 is cleared and becomes clear information. That is, the state illustrated in FIG. 12E is a state after logout. As described above, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 functions as a generation unit capable of generating conversion information from at least the second information stored in the second storage unit. The decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an output unit that can output at least the conversion information generated by the generation unit. The timing at which the second release information is cleared may be at the same time as the password issuance, may be before the password issuance, or may be after the password issuance. There may be. In this embodiment, the password issuance is realized by displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, it may be realized by voice output, or a printer is provided to output a paper on which the password is printed. May be realized. In this embodiment, the second release information is cleared when the password is issued. However, the second release information may not be cleared even when the password is issued. In this case, the second release information may be overwritten when newly logged in. In addition, in a state where the second release information obtained from the input password is stored in the second storage area M2, a new password may be accepted. At this time, the second release information obtained from the new password may be overwritten in the second storage area M2. At this time, the player may be able to select whether or not to overwrite. When overwriting, the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 before the new password is input is once cleared, and then the second release obtained from the new password. Information may be stored in the second storage area M2. In addition, the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 before the new password is input and the second release information obtained from the new password are combined to create a new second release. Information may be generated and stored in the second storage area M2. According to this, for example, it may be possible to select more effects by inputting a new password during login. Also, a plurality of second storage areas M2 are provided, and second release information obtained from a new password is stored in the second storage area M2 in which the second release information is stored before the new password is input. May be stored in another second storage area M2.

  Thereafter, for example, when the player performs an operation for executing music selection using the operation key unit 190, the music list ML is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the selectable music is determined based on the first release information and the second release information, but the second release information is the clear information at the timing shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, in the music list ML, “Song A” and “Song B” are displayed as selectable songs corresponding to the first release information indicating Level 2.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. For example, when the password input is completed as described above on the password input screen as shown in FIG. Decrypt password. Then, the second release information as the second information can be obtained from the decrypted password. At the timing shown in FIG. 12G, for example, second release information indicating level 3 is obtained, and the information is stored in the second storage area M2. The first release information indicates level 2.

  Thereafter, the player plays a game, and when the special symbol display device 208 starts the jackpot game when the special symbol A, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214, FIG. A big hit start effect as shown in h) is executed. At this time, for example, due to the occurrence of an event that the probability variation jackpot has started, the first release information stored in the first storage area M1 is updated from the information indicating level 2 to the information indicating level 3. The second release information stored in the second storage area M2 is updated from information indicating level 3 to information indicating level 4.

  Then, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 12 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for selecting the music to be used in the BGM in the jackpot game as described above. Is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 12 (i), the first release information indicates level 3, the second release information indicates level 4, and the level of the second release information is higher than the level of the first release information. Therefore, the second release information is applied in preference to the first release information. Therefore, in the music list ML, “Song A”, “Song B”, “Song C”, and “Song D” are displayed as selectable songs corresponding to the second release information indicating level 4. . The other music is grayed out without displaying the music name so that it cannot be selected. After that, a big hit game is played with the music selected by the player as BGM.

  When the operation for issuing the password is performed by the operation key unit 190 in the above-described manner when the big hit game is finished and the standby state is entered, as shown in FIG. The password is displayed (issued). Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 12J, the second release information is in a state where the level is increased by one from the time of login. When the password is issued, the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 is cleared and becomes clear information. That is, the state shown in FIG. 12J is a state after logout.

  Thereafter, for example, when the player performs an operation for executing music selection using the operation key unit 190, the music list ML is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the selectable music is determined based on the first release information and the second release information, but at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (k), the second release information is the clear information. ing. Therefore, in the music list ML, “Song A”, “Song B”, and “Song C” are displayed as selectable music corresponding to the first release information indicating level 3.

  In the present embodiment, the release information indicating the high level information is determined from the first release information and the second release information, and the selectable music is determined based on the release information. Of the release information and the second release information, the player may be able to select in advance which release information is used to determine a selectable music piece. In addition, during login, the second release information is used in preference to the first release information regardless of the level indicated by the release information, and a selectable music piece may be determined based on the second release information. .

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment.

  FIG. 13A shows the decorative symbol display device 208 after the password is input in the above-described manner and the user is logged in (during login), and the operation key unit 190 performs an operation for performing music selection. Shows a state in which the music list ML is displayed. Specifically, “decoration 3” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 5”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is confirmed and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. At this time, the start of the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 and Special Fig. 2 is not suspended, and the symbol variation of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 is not executed. Moreover, the timing shown in FIG. 13A is, for example, a standby state in the probability variation state. Therefore, the first special figure 2 hold display h21 and the second special figure are displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 hold display h22, 3rd special figure 2 hold display h23 and 4th special figure 2 hold display h24 are displayed. The first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all displayed to be blank. In this effect example, a message indicating that the user is logged in is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol I, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 13A, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol I” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure I” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed.

  Further, on the right side of FIG. 13A, the storage states of the first storage area M1 and the second storage area M2 are shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 13A, first release information indicating level 2 is stored in the first storage area M1, and second storage indicating level 3 is stored in the second storage area M2. Release information is stored.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for selecting a song to be used in BGM in the big hit game when the operation key unit 190 performs an operation for performing a song selection in the manner described above. . At the timing shown in FIG. 13A, the first release information indicates level 2, the second release information indicates level 3, and the level of the second release information is higher than the level of the first release information. Therefore, the second release information is applied in preference to the first release information. Therefore, in the music list ML, “Song A”, “Song B”, and “Song C” can be selected in correspondence with the second release information indicating level 3, and accordingly (No. Second display image) is displayed. The other music is grayed out without displaying the music name so that it cannot be selected.

  Further, in this production example, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, based on at least one of the number of winning balls, the “winning number” representing the number of winning games, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls Each information (first display image) of “title” representing the determined rank is displayed. These pieces of information represent, for example, results added from timing such as when the power is turned on or when a reset operation by the player's operation key unit 190 is performed. First release information and second release information It is information not based on.

  Thereafter, when the password is issued in the above-described manner, as shown in FIG. Then, the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 is cleared and becomes clear information. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13B, the only selectable songs are “Song A” and “Song B” corresponding to the first release information indicating level 2.

  On the other hand, since the information on the number of balls, the number of wins, and the title is information that is not based on the first release information and the second release information, the display content does not change before and after logout. In other words, this effect example represents an example in which the display content does not change before and after logout.

  Next, some other examples of effect selection display will be described.

  FIG.13 (c) is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed when selecting a music during a symbol fluctuation display. The state shown in FIG. 13C is, for example, during the execution of the symbol variation shown in FIG. At this time, since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit. Further, since there are four variable display hold numbers in the special figure 2, four lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 218 are turned on, and correspondingly, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, second The special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all displayed in the default display mode. FIG. 13C shows a state after logout.

  Then, when the player performs an operation for executing music selection by the operation key unit 190 during such a symbol change, as shown in FIG. 13C, the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The music scroll selection image SC is displayed in the portion. The player can operate the cross key of the operation key unit 190 to scroll the music list leftward or rightward. At the timing shown in FIG. 13C, the first release information indicates level 2 and the second release information is clear information. Therefore, the scroll selection image SC corresponds to the first release information. "Song A" and "Song B" are displayed as selectable music. The player operates the cross key of the operation key unit 190 to scroll the desired music piece until it reaches the center position (position indicated by the arrow) of the scroll selection image SC, and presses the OK button. Selection can be made. In the present embodiment, for example, a song is selected using the scroll selection image SC during symbol variation, and a song is selected using the song list ML during a big hit game or in a standby state. May be. Further, during the big hit game, the music may be selected using the scroll selection image SC, and the music may be selected using the music list ML in the symbol variation or standby state. In the standby state, music may be selected using the scroll selection image SC, and the music may be selected using the music list ML during the big hit game or the symbol change.

  In the above-described example, one or a plurality of songs that can be used as BGM in the jackpot game or the like are specified (determined) based on the first release information and the second release information, and the player's desired one is determined from the specified songs. However, the present invention is not limited to music and can be applied to other types of effects. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (d), a character list CL is displayed instead of the music list ML, and desired to appear during the game (for example, during a big hit game or during symbol variation). The character image may be selected by the player. FIG. 13D shows a state after logout. In the example shown in FIG. 13D, since the first release information indicates level 2 and the second release information is clear information, the character list CL includes the first release information indicating level 2. Corresponding to “Character A” and “Character B” are displayed as selectable character images. The other character images are grayed out without displaying the character names so that they cannot be selected. In the above-described embodiment, the music and the character image have been described as the targets for designating the selectable effects. However, other effects may be used, for example, the effects during the big hit game or the symbol variation This can also be applied to the story or production mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, the selection of selectable music is performed based on the first release information and the second release information, and the designation of other effects such as the character image to appear is the first. The designation may be made based on other information such as the number of consecutive resorts, for example, without being based on the one release information and the second release information.

  FIG. 13 (e) shows an example in which a character image can be selected in addition to music in the jackpot game. In this production example, at a predetermined timing during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 13 (e), on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a music list ML for selecting the music used in the BGM in the big hit game. Is displayed, and on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character list CL for selecting a character image to appear during the game is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 13E is a state before login. In the example shown in FIG. 13E, the first release information stored in the first storage area M1 is level 2, and the second release information stored in the second storage area M2 is used. Is clear information. Therefore, in this production example, the selectable music and the selectable character image are determined from the first release information indicating level 2. That is, in the music list ML, “Song A” and “Song B” are displayed as selectable songs corresponding to the first release information indicating level 2, and the character list CL similarly Corresponding to the first release information indicating level 2, "Character A" and "Character B" are displayed as selectable character images. In this effect example, before login, an example is shown in which a plurality of selections (music and character images in the example shown in FIG. 13E) are influenced based on the first release information.

  FIG. 13 (f) is an example of an effect similar to FIG. 13 (e), but unlike FIG. 13 (e), it shows a state after login. The second storage area M2 stores second release information indicating level 3 obtained from the password input in the manner described above. First release information indicating level 2 is stored in the first storage area M1. Therefore, in this production example, for selectable music, the level of the second release information is higher than the level of the first release information, so the second release information is applied in preference to the first release information. In the music list ML, “Song A”, “Song B”, and “Song C” are displayed as selectable songs corresponding to the second release information indicating level 3. On the other hand, the selectable character image is not based on the second release information, but is determined based on the first release information, so that “Character A” corresponds to the first release information indicating level 2. "And" Character B "are displayed as selectable character images. In this way, in this production example, after login, the selection (in the example shown in FIG. 13 (f), music) is influenced based on the second release information. An example is shown.

  Next, some modified examples in the first embodiment will be described as examples.

  FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining selectable effects. This table is, for example, a table configured in a matrix of M (for example, 5) on the vertical axis and N (for example, 12) on the horizontal axis, for example, the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. Is remembered. In this table, for example, the vertical axis corresponds to the second information, and the horizontal axis corresponds to the first information. In the present embodiment, the vertical axis corresponds to the level indicated by the second release information (that is, the level of the input password), and the horizontal axis corresponds to the time axis. Examples of the time axis include “month” information output from the RTC 438 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example. That is, for example, if the current month is “July”, it is possible to select an effect corresponding to July. In addition, when the shipment month of the pachinko machine 100 is April, and this April is the initial value, a corresponding effect can be selected in the range from the initial value of April to the current month of July. It is also possible to make a dramatic production. As an example of the time axis, not only “month” information but also “day” information, “hour” information, or “minute” information can be employed, and information output from the RTC 438 is also possible. It is also possible to adopt an elapsed time, an elapsed number of days, or the like calculated based on the above. For example, when a predetermined time or a predetermined number of days have elapsed, a selectable effect can be increased. As information corresponding to the vertical axis, in addition to the level indicated by the second release information described above, for example, second values such as the acquired value described above, the number of symbol variations, the number of jackpots, the number of probable changes, the number of balls played, etc. Various types of information that can be adopted as information can be applied. In addition, the information corresponding to the horizontal axis is not limited to the time axis, for example, various values that can be adopted as the first information such as the acquired value, the number of symbol fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of probable changes, the number of balls, etc. Information is applicable. In the present embodiment, the horizontal axis of this table corresponds to “month” information output from the RTC 438. As described above, in the present embodiment, the contents of the selectable effects may be determined by the combination of the vertical axis parameter and the horizontal axis parameter using the table described above. Further, in addition to this table, the contents of effects that can be selected may be determined in consideration of information that does not depend on the first information or the second information, such as the number of consecutive resorts. That is, in addition to the first information and the second information, for example, the contents of the selectable effects may be determined based on the third information.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen that is displayed when the content of the effect is selected. Specifically, FIG. 14B shows a state where the music list ML and the character list CL are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 14B shows a state after logging in. The first storage area M1 stores the first release information indicating that the month is February obtained from the RTC 438. The second storage area M2 stores second release information indicating the level C obtained from the password input in the manner described above. In this embodiment, the selectable music is determined based on the first release information, and the selectable character image is determined based on the second release information. That is, since the first release information indicates February, for example, in the case where the effect is selectable in the range from January to February with January as the initial value, “Song A” corresponding to January and “Song B” corresponding to February are displayed as selectable songs. Here, only “Song B” corresponding to February may be displayed as selectable songs. On the other hand, since the second release information indicates level C, in the character list CL, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character C” can be selected as character images corresponding to Level C. It is displayed. In addition, it is good also as a character image which can select only "Character C" corresponding to the level C.

  In the present embodiment, even if the first input information is updated while the screen (selection screen) for selecting the production content based on at least the first information is displayed, the selection screen being displayed is changed. You may make it continue without performing. In addition, when the first input information is updated during the display of the effect content selection screen based on the first information, the displayed selection screen may be changed at the updated timing. In addition, even when the second input information is updated during the display of the selection screen of the production content based on the second information, the selection screen being displayed is not changed and the display is continued. Alternatively, when the second input information is updated during the display of the effect content selection screen based on the second information, the displayed selection screen may be changed at the updated timing.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram for describing a character image displayed during symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 14C, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started. The first special figure hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in a default form, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is a blank display. . In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character A, which is an example of a character image, is displayed. This character A is, for example, a character that may appear in a normal symbol variation display, and the display mode changes from the first mode to the second mode (for example, display of a dialogue as a tutorial effect according to the progress of the game). May change to a display mode added to the character image. In addition, the character A may change to a third mode (for example, a display mode in which “Gekiatsu” is added to the character image as a speech trailer) as a jackpot notice or a prefetch notice. FIG. 14C shows a state after logging in, and the first release information indicating that it is February obtained from the RTC 438 is stored in the first storage area M1. In the second storage area M2, second release information indicating the level C obtained from the password input in the manner described above is stored. Based on the release information, the display mode of the character A may be changed. For example, the clothing of character A may be changed corresponding to the information of “month” indicated by the first release information, and the equipment of character A is installed according to the level indicated by the second release information. It may be changed or increased.

  FIG. 14D is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when a music piece is selected. Specifically, FIG. 14D shows a state where the first music list MLa and the second music list MLb are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 14D shows a state after logging in. The first storage area M1 stores first release information indicating that the month is February obtained from the RTC 438. The second storage area M2 stores second release information indicating the level C obtained from the password input in the manner described above. In the present embodiment, the music that can be selected in the first music list MLa is determined based on the first release information, and the music that can be selected in the second music list MLb is determined using the first release information and The decision is based on the second release information. That is, for the first music list MLa, since the first release information indicates February, for example, music for which the corresponding music can be selected in the range from January to February with January as the initial value. In this case, “Song A1” corresponding to January and “Song A2” corresponding to February are displayed as selectable songs. That is, for the first music list MLa, based on the information obtained from the RTC 438, for example, selectable music (music to be released) gradually increases as the “month” elapses. ing. Here, only “Song A2” corresponding to February may be displayed as selectable songs. On the other hand, for the second music list MLb, since the first release information indicates February and the second release information indicates level C, for example, a level equal to or lower than level C in February (level “Song B2” and “Song C2”, which are songs corresponding to A, Level B and Level C), are displayed as selectable songs. Here, since the music that can be selected in the second music list MLb depends on the second release information, for example, when the second release information becomes clear information after logging out, It becomes impossible to select. Therefore, in this case, all the music pieces are grayed out to notify that no music piece can be selected.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the contents of the selectable effects are changed or increased based on the date / time information of the RTC 438.

  In the present embodiment, the date and time information of the RTC 438 may be acquired, for example, in the initial setting (step S301) of the first sub-control unit main process described above with reference to FIG. With this configuration, for example, even if the date changes during the display of an effect selection screen such as a music list, the first release information is not changed, so the contents of selectable effects change midway. It does not increase or increase. Further, since the first release information is not changed unless the power is turned off / on, the contents of selectable effects do not change or increase when the power is turned on. Therefore, there are cases where the complexity of processing can be reduced. In the case of the above-described configuration, in order to ensure real-time performance for improving the fun of the game, for example, it may be possible to prevent sales at 12 o'clock at night or 24 hours, etc. May be possible.

  In the present embodiment, the date / time information of the RTC 438 may be acquired, for example, when an effect selection screen such as a music list is displayed or after a password is input. With this configuration, for example, even if the date changes during the display of the effect selection screen, the first release information is not changed, so that selectable effect contents change or increase in the middle. Not to In this case, for example, since the first release information can be updated by once ending the display of the effect selection screen, the processing complexity may be reduced. Further, it may be possible to prevent the player from being confused when selecting an effect.

  In the present embodiment, the time and date information of the RTC 438 can be set as appropriate, for example, the date and time information of the RTC 438 is acquired at the timing of using the date and time information. According to such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 11 (e), when selecting an effect to be executed during the big hit game, when the selectable effect changes according to the date and time information, The date and time information can be acquired at the start of the big hit game. For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (i), when an operation for performing an effect selection by the operation key unit 190 is performed, The date and time information can be acquired each time. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect in which real-time performance is ensured and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the contents of the selectable effects determined based on the game history such as the password input and the number of consecutive games may be configured to be changeable every time the password is input or the game history is updated, for example. . On the other hand, the contents of the selectable effects determined based on the date / time information of the RTC 438 are changed every time the date / time information as the first information in the first storage area M1 is updated. Instead, for example, it may be configured to be changeable at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of initial setting described above).

  Subsequently, another pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. In the following description, items that overlap with the items described so far may be described again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

[Embodiment 2]
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the circuit configuration of the control unit, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal symbol of the pachinko machine 100 Since the types of special drawings and ordinary drawings that are stopped and displayed by the display device 210 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 1 to 5 and described above, in the following description, these configurations will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hitting time. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S1101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S1101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub-control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to the WDT process and is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S1103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for timer number determination for special drawing and for universal use, both of which determine a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S1105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S1103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S1103 and S1105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. Note that at the start of the timer interrupt process, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (in this embodiment, about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt period). To restart once).

  First, in step S1201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S1201, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step S1201, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S1203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S1207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the special symbol for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 are displayed. 1 display symbol update timer, a special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, Various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined end effect period and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S1209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S1209), first, when there are winnings in the winning ports 226, 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning port or for each starting port. The value in the storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of special figure variable games held is a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). ), The predetermined start-up information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map start opening 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the general map at that timing is used. The value of the random number counter for generating the winning random number value is stored in the random value storage area different from that for the special chart provided in the RAM 308 as the normal winning random number value as start information. In this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to receive a prize (win ball) at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. When detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes winnings in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 ( Set the winning acceptance information indicating the presence or absence of (entering).

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holds is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S1211 without storing the start information.

  In addition, when the winning determination process (step S1209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The number of holds at the time of executing the current look-ahead process through the winning determination process (step S1209) is compared with the number of old holds to determine whether or not the number of holds has increased. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S1213 shown in FIG. 15B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the special figure determination result here is also a result of preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S1213 shown in FIG. 15B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S1213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure predetermination result (also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process of the present embodiment, when the big hit game is being played, and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is on), the start information prefetching in FIG. Pre-determination is not performed, and in these cases, “pre-determination” information indicating that pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the pre-read start information of FIG. Store in the reserved area. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In this embodiment, the start-up information itself is not pre-read. However, the pre-read may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification may not be performed. Furthermore, the pre-read and the preliminary determination are performed. The aspect which does not alert | report a result may be sufficient.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 15B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S1209 (step S1211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in any one of the display modes (common figure B shown in FIG. 5C). In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game. In this way, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the universal display device 210 corresponds to an example of the symbol display control means.

  Also, in the universal diagram related processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing at which the normal diagram stop time management timer value is changed from 1 to 0), if it is in the electric support state, the setting area of the RAM 308 is entered. The normal operation is set, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (6 seconds in this embodiment). 1 is always output, and information indicating the release period is always set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that controls the opening of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start area control unit. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  Further, in the case of the electric support state, the setting of the RAM 308 is set in the general diagram related processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the blade closing time management timer value changes from 1 to 0). Set the area to inactive.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15B, the special figure related process (step S1213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S1211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S1215) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the hour / short flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S1215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S1215).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S1215).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S1215) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). To do. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S1215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S1209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S1209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, the validity determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination of success / failure (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the determination processing here determines the lottery means (presence / absence determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special symbol determination process corresponds to an example of a symbol determination unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol design determination process, the variable display period in the variable graphic display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of validity is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents a variable display period (special drawing change time), but may be a decorative display variable display period.

  In this embodiment, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in a very shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. Timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds, and timer 7 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 8 seconds. These timers 3 and 7 represent normal special figure fluctuation time (reference special figure fluctuation time). The fluctuation of the special figure based on the timer 3 is referred to as normal fluctuation 1, and the special figure based on the timer 7 is designated as the special figure fluctuation time. The fluctuation in the figure is called normal fluctuation 2. In the timers 1 to 3 and the timer 7, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the decoration pattern fluctuation pattern in the decoration symbol display device 208. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in a stopped manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is the same as the symbol display area that is stopped), a combination of predetermined jackpot symbols (FIG. 5) This is a state in which the “decorative symbol combination 1” and “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 40 seconds, and timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 50 seconds. When the timer 5 or 6 is determined, super-reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 60 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. In this embodiment, when the timer 8 is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is the full rotation reach. Is selected. The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a timer number determining random number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, the other special figure 2 related lottery process is performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S1213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S1215).

  Here, before describing the command setting transmission process, the specifications of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a table showing the specifications of the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) according to the present embodiment and the specifications of other types of pachinko machines (game table B). Both the game table A and the game table B have the same game format as a ball game machine, are of the same model and series, and have the same hardware elements such as the board configuration, but the game table A And the game table B have different software elements.

  First, the specifications of the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 (game table A) of this embodiment is a so-called MAX machine. There are two special figure start ports (first special figure start port 230 and second special figure start port 232). Hereinafter, the case of entering the first special figure starting port 230 may be simply referred to as special figure 1, and the case of entering the second special figure starting port 232 may be simply referred to as special figure 2. May be called. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. There is only one variable prize opening 234 called a big prize opening, and when one ball enters the variable prize opening 234, 1R ends. The number of award balls is paid out by 3 balls each when one ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 and when one ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and one ball enters the general winning port 226. In this case, 10 balls are paid out, and 14 balls are paid out when one ball is entered into the variable winning opening 231. In the big hit of this embodiment, 15R is the maximum number of rounds, and as described above, 1R ends when 8 balls enter the variable prize opening 231, and 14 balls are paid out when one ball enters the variable prize opening 231. For this reason, the maximum number of balls to be obtained in the big hit in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is 1680. The big hit probability is 1 / 399.610 in the special figure low probability state (non-probable change state), whereas in the special figure high probability state (probability change state), it becomes 1 / 39.961 and becomes the special figure low probability state. Compared to 10 times higher. The small hit probability is 1 / 241.830 in both FIG. 1 and FIG. If you win a jackpot with a probability change (Special Figure A, Special Figure C, Special Figure E), the special figure high probability state (probability change state) will be maintained until you win the next jackpot, such as Special Figure B or Special Figure D If you win a regular big hit with a short time (a big hit with a short time without a certain change), the short time state (electric support state) will be maintained for 100 times after the big hit game is completed. Shifts to a non-time-short state (non-electric support state). If a special jackpot with a certain probability such as special figure A or special figure C is won, the short time state is maintained until the next big jackpot game is started. The probability of hitting the general figure variable game is 1/101 in the low probability state (non-electric support state) of the normal figure, and 1 / 1.02 in the high probability state (electric support state) of the normal figure. Compared to the special figure low probability state, it rises 100 times.

Next, specifications of other types of pachinko machines (game table B) will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine (game table A) of the present embodiment. The specifications of the gaming table B described here are determined from the design stage, and this gaming table B is a so-called sweet digital machine. The gaming table B is a winning order variation machine in which the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are not superior or inferior, and the special figure variable game is started in the winning order. When nine balls enter the variable prize opening 234, which is the only one big prize opening, 1R ends. Therefore, the specified number of winnings to the variable winning opening 234 is one ball more than that of the game table A. However, when one ball is entered into the variable winning opening 231, only 13 balls are paid out, which is one less than the game table A. The game table B is not provided with the special figures C, D, F, H, and J shown in FIG. 5, 5R special jackpot symbol (with short time with probability change), 5R big jackpot symbol (with short time without probability change), 2R hidden probability variation (no short time with probability variation), first small hit, and first off symbol are prepared. Therefore, 5R is the maximum number of rounds in the big hit of the game table B, and the maximum number of balls to be played is 585 balls, which is overwhelmingly smaller than the game table A. On the other hand, the big hit probability is 1 / 87.850 in the special figure low probability state (non-probability change state), and in the special figure high probability state (probability change state), it is 1 / 1.894, which is a big hit in comparison with the game table A. Easy to win. The small hit probability is 1 / 87.850 in FIG. 1 and 1/65536 in FIG. When winning a jackpot with a probability change, after the jackpot game is over, the probability variation state is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 24 times, and the 25th time is shifted to the non-probability variation state. That is, the probability variation system (probability variation type) is the number of times cut (ST). Note that the probability (X) of pulling back the special figure at the high probability by ST24 rotation is {1- (1 / 11.894)} ²⁴ = 87.8%. Further, in the 2R hidden probability change described above, the variable winning opening 234 opens only for an extremely short time in which it is almost impossible to enter a ball, and it is difficult to expect a payout based on winning in the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, 5R special big hit and 5R special big hit will be given for the ball with the ball. Of these, the 5R special big hit will be given for the short time. While the special figure variation game is played 24 times, the short time state (electric support state) is maintained, and the 25th time the state shifts to the non-short time state (non-electric support state).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) of the present embodiment and the game table B differ in the amount of balls obtained in one big hit. Normally, the game play rate in pachinko machines is designed to be around 99% to 107%. However, by setting a difference in the jackpot probability and the maximum number of balls to be played (the maximum number of balls acquired in the jackpot) There is a difference in the wave of the ball for each game machine. The pachinko machine 100 (game table A) of the present embodiment has a large denominator of jackpot probability in a special figure low probability state, so the investment amount tends to be large. It is. On the other hand, the gaming table B generally has a small denominator of the big hit probability, and in particular, the denominator of the big hit probability in the special figure low probability state is small. However, it is a sweet digital machine with few hits in one big hit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) and the game table B of the present embodiment are common in that they include a plurality of special figure display devices, but priority is given to the variable game in the special figure display device. It depends on whether or not there is.

  Next, the command setting transmission process (step S1215) shown in FIG. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, closing winning prize opening Command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). It is composed.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating information, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command displays a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image that informs the player that the big hit is to be ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the big win game Ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S1215, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Further, in this step S1215, a general command usual figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15B, an external output signal setting process (step S1217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S1219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S1201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first symbol display device 210, Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S1219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 15A, but before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1201 is stored in each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, in step S1301 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S1301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S1307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S1309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S 1307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S1311, when the pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S1309 to effect data in response to the pressing of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In step S1313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S1309, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S1315, if there is a command to drive circuit 420 for various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S1309, this command is output to drive circuit 420.

  In step S1317, if there is a command to the drive circuit 422 of the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read out in S1309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S1309, a process for setting this control command in the transmission area is performed (step S1319).

  Subsequently, an original mode control process is performed (step S1321), and the process returns to step S1303. The original mode control process (step S1321) will be described later.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S1331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S1303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S1343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S1319, the production random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a display unit. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 corresponds to an example of an effect execution unit.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Subsequently, a characteristic process in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set the original (Daitomo) mode.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the original mode.

  In this original (Daitomo) mode, a game machine capable of setting the original mode, and history information of the results of playing the game with the original mode set is stored in the game machine. In the game stand, various privileges according to the history information (for example, an effect having a low appearance rate or an effect indicating information relating to the profit of the game) are given. When the game in which the original mode is set is to be ended, individual setting information, which is individual player information, including history information stored in the game table is input to the server. Each time a game in which the original mode is set is finished, individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game is issued from the gaming table. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. When the individual setting information stored in the server is input to the game machine when the next game is played, a privilege according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is also provided at the next game. This individual setting information is included in an encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits, and is exchanged between the game console-player (external device apparatus) -server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine stores a corresponding model code. In specifications where history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes. In specifications where history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  FIG. 18 shows a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 which is a kind of gaming machine and a server S operated by a gaming machine manufacturer. The server S and the pachinko machine 100 are connected via a communication network N. The communication network N here is the Internet, but may be a network constructed by the TCP / IP protocol, for example, a LAN (Local Area Network). Accordingly, the server S and the pachinko machine 100 may be connected indoors with a LAN cable. In this case, the server S may be a hall computer of a hall in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Furthermore, the server function may be built in the pachinko machine 100.

  FIG. 18 also shows a cellular phone terminal M as an example of an external device having a communication function and an image reading function. A cellular phone terminal M shown in FIG. 18 has a camera function and a barcode reader function. When the mobile phone terminal M captures a two-dimensional barcode with the camera function, the barcode reader function is activated and character information included in the two-dimensional barcode is extracted. Furthermore, the mobile phone terminal M is a communication terminal that can access a web page by using an HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) protocol. In the following description, a web page refers to a page that conforms to the HTTP protocol. A communication network N shown in FIG. 18 is also connected to a server provided by a mobile phone terminal operator, not shown here, and the server S and the mobile phone terminal M transmit data via the communication network N. Can send and receive.

  Further, FIG. 18 also shows a slot machine 900 as a game table. The slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18 is also a game machine that can set the original mode.

  The server S is provided with a web page, such as an initial registration page for member registration, a password issuance page, an update reception page, and a customization page.

  FIG. 19A shows the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG.

  The operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 19A includes a cross key 191, an OK button 192, and a cancel button 193. When the cancel button 193 is pressed, it is possible to return to the previous screen.

  When the OK button 192 is pressed in the non-game state (here, the demo screen is displayed), a menu window 610 and a customization guide 620 are additionally displayed on the demo screen as shown in FIG. The Here, the non-game state corresponds to a state in which the special symbol is stopped. The demonstration screen informs that a menu window 610 and a customization guide 620 are additionally displayed when the OK button 192 is pressed.

  Here, the timing at which additional display of the menu window 610 and the customization guide 620 is permitted will be described in detail. Additional display of the menu window 610 and the customization guide 620 may be permitted from the time when the change of the special symbol is started until the change of any of the decorative symbols is stopped. That is, as an interest of the game stand, the player can be shown the stop pattern of the decorative symbols, but the menu display may be permitted as long as the display of the mode is not disturbed. However, in the aspect in which the menu window 610 and the customization guide 620 are additionally displayed so as to cover the variation area of the decorative symbol, it is preferable to allow additional display while the symbol variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is preferable that priority is given to the change display of a decoration symbol, and additional display is not permitted until the change of one of the decoration symbols is stopped and displayed after the start. In other words, it is preferable that the menu window 610 and the customization guide 620 are additionally displayed at positions outside the decorative symbol variation area. Further, it is more preferable that the additional display is performed at a position outside the display area on the side of FIG.

  As a period during which additional display of the menu window 610 or the like is prohibited in principle, the decorative symbol stopping operation can be given. The symbol stop operation is a period from the reach state of reach or super reach until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, a fluctuation fluctuation period, or a symbol fixed display period. As described above, the interest of the game stand depends on the stop mode of the symbol, so that the menu call is prohibited while the mode is displayed. Also, during the big hit game and the small hit game, the prohibition period is also entered. During the big hit game or the small hit game, as in the case of the symbol stop mode, it is a period in which a profit is given to the player, and information indicating the magnitude of the profit given to the player thereafter is also notified. Therefore, additional display of the menu window 610 or the like that disturbs the notification is prohibited. As will be described later, functions that can be executed from the menu window 610 are mainly an original mode setting / releasing operation, an original mode setting confirmation, and the like. Since the opportunity to release the original mode can be regarded as the opportunity for the player to end the game, the additional display of the menu window 610 is problematic if it is possible only during the period when the player is likely to end the game. There is no.

  Furthermore, there is a period during which the additional display may be prohibited exceptionally even at the timing when the additional display of the menu window 610 or the like can be performed. For example, during the so-called pseudo-continuous execution, the first decoration symbol change start to stop display may be prohibited. In addition, a period in which a special effect that makes the effect mode different from normal for a predetermined period of time after the end of the big hit game or after the end of the small hit game may be prohibited.

  Further, additional display of the menu window 610 or the like may be prohibited based on the fact that the gaming state has shifted to a so-called latent state after displaying the special drawings E, F, G, and H. Since it is difficult to understand from the outside whether the latent state is advantageous or unfavorable to the player, the beginner may not be able to grasp the latent state, but may stand up By setting the original mode in advance, when the latent state starts, the original mode cannot be ended, and the game table operation is reduced while preventing the player from leaving the seat in a state in which the latent state is advantageous to the player. Sometimes it can be suppressed.

  When the gaming machine is the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18, the additional display of the menu window 610 or the like is a medal insertion acceptance period. This medal insertion acceptance period corresponds to the display of the demonstration screen, after the display determination due to the reel stop, after the medal payout, or after the settlement button is pressed.

  As a period during which additional display of the menu window 610 or the like is prohibited in principle, a bonus, a bonus confirmation screen is displayed, a continuous production is being executed, a so-called replay time (RT) or assist replay time (ART) end screen is displayed. Become inside. That is, when a period advantageous to the player ends, the additional display is prohibited at the timing of notifying the end. In the case of the slot machine 900, since a reverse effect (notification that the advantageous period is still continued) is frequently performed in the next game operation (the bet pressing, the start lever pressing) after the end notification, the simply advantageous period If the permission or prohibition of the additional display of the menu window 610 or the like is switched depending on whether or not the continuation is continued, it will be known whether the advantageous period is continued or ended. Therefore, the additional display is uniformly prohibited at the end of the advantageous period.

  Furthermore, there is a period during which the additional display may be prohibited exceptionally even at the timing when the additional display of the menu window 610 or the like can be performed. For example, during the occurrence of errors such as selectors, hoppers, doors open, etc., it is exceptionally prohibited.

  Further, as is common to the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine 900, the original mode can be disabled and the setting of the original mode can be prohibited by the original mode selection switch 161 shown in FIG. In addition, the first mode for prohibiting additional display of the menu window 610 or the like, that is, the first mode in which the password cannot be input and the two-dimensional code cannot be issued, and the password can be input but the two-dimensional code cannot be issued. A second aspect may be provided. This second mode is processing for a case where development on the server S side is not in time, for example. Although it is possible to make a hidden element or the like appear on the game machine by inputting a password, the server S cannot manage history information or the like. Further, a third mode may be provided in which password entry is omitted and a two-dimensional code can be issued. According to the third aspect, it is possible to issue a two-dimensional code when the mission is completed or the game is completed, and the history information can be managed on the server S side. It cannot be reflected.

  FIG. 19 (i) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “membership registration” is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (i-1) and the like, “member registration”, “password entry”, “two-dimensional code issuance”, “data clear”, “end” are prepared as menus displayed on the menu window 610. By operating the cross key 191 shown in FIG. 19A in the menu window 610, the cursor 191a is moved. When the cursor 191a is moved to a desired menu and the OK button 192 is pressed once, the cursor 191a is moved. The menu displayed at the position of is selected.

  In (i-1) in the figure, “member registration” is selected and the member registration screen is opened (see (i-2) in the figure). On the member registration screen, a two-dimensional barcode C1 for password acquisition is displayed. This two-dimensional barcode C1 includes the URL of the registration page for initial registration on the server S side. To set the original mode, you must first register as a member. The player reads the two-dimensional barcode C1 and obtains the URL of the initial registration page with the mobile phone terminal M having the camera function and the barcode reader function as shown in FIG. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile phone terminal M. The server S acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile phone terminal M or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes an initial value of history information. The history information is stored in the server S in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the server S, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M.

  FIG. 19 (ii) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “INPUT PASSWORD” is selected.

  In FIG. 11 (ii-1), “password input” is selected, and the password input screen is opened (see FIG. 11 (ii-2)). A player who has already registered as a member and wants to set the original mode must first enter a password before starting the game. The password can be acquired by accessing the password issuing page of the server S from the mobile phone terminal M. When the server S acquires the personal identification information of the person who has accessed, the server S issues a password including history information stored in association with the personal identification information, and the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M. Is done. The password is encrypted with a predetermined number of digits, for example, “GI ¥ LS”. The amount of information that can be included in the password depends on the number of digits of the password × the number of input character types. The password may include only personal identification information for identifying the player, and the history information may be stored in association with the personal identification information on the game stand side. By storing the game, even if the table is moved, the game can be performed in the original mode under the same conditions.

  Further, even if the OK button 192 is pressed once on the member registration screen shown in FIG. 19 (i-2), this password input screen is opened. A list of alphabets and symbols is displayed on the password input screen. By operating the cross key 191 shown in FIG. 19A in the list, the cursor 191a is moved, the cursor 191a is moved to the desired alphabet or symbol, and the OK button 192 is pressed once. An alphabet or a symbol combined with the cursor 191a is input. While viewing the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M, the player operates the cross key 191 and the OK button 192 to input the password.

  In the pachinko machine where the password is entered, the encrypted password is decrypted to obtain history information. Here, when history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, it is notified that the password could not be recognized (FIG. 19 (ii-3)). When the predetermined time has elapsed, the menu screen 610 and the customization guide 620 are switched to the demonstration screen. On the other hand, when the history information can be acquired, it is notified that the password has been successfully recognized (see FIG. 19 (ii-4)), and the setting of the original mode is completed. In this embodiment, the original mode cannot be set unless a correct password is input. When the original mode is set, a history including the game result after setting and the like is temporarily stored in the pachinko machine 100. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a game reflecting the history information included in the password. For example, the continuation of the game represented by the history information included in the password can be enjoyed, or a privilege according to the history information is given. When the screen shown in FIG. 19 (ii-4) is displayed for a predetermined time, the screen is switched to the demo screen.

  Even if the password has already been input and the original mode has been started, the input of the new password may be accepted, but it may be notified that the password has already been input.

  FIG. 20 (i) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “2D code issuance” is selected.

  In FIG. 20 (i-1), “2D code issuance” is selected, and the 2D code issuance screen is opened via the warning screen shown in FIG. )reference). The two-dimensional code C2 generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. The issuance of the two-dimensional code C2 is prepared on the assumption that the player selects it when the game with the original mode set is finished.

  The two-dimensional code here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in increments of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can do. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. Instead of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string (for example, a password) may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of character strings, as the amount of information to be included increases, the number of character strings increases, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be written down, so it may be possible to reduce the burden by informing with a two-dimensional code. is there.

  In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code C2 includes personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, and information representing the mission achievement status and the accumulated value of the original mode points, which will be described in detail later. In addition, the number of winnings at the special figure starting port (230, 232), the total number of reel rotations, the number of bonuses (big hit), the number of small roles (small hit), and store identification information in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. , Information unique to the game machine, movable status, number of errors, etc. may be included. Information representing the game result, mission achievement status, accumulated value of original mode points, number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code C2 includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the server S.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code C2 is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code C2 is erased from the pachinko machine 100. The warning screen shown in FIG. 20 (i-2) is a screen for warning the player about this.

  When the player photographs the issued two-dimensional code C2 using the camera function of the mobile phone terminal M, the bar code reader function is activated. On the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M shown in FIG. 20, “http: //www.˜/jp” representing the address of the update acceptance page prepared in the server S is included in the two-dimensional code C2, and the personal identification A URL to which an argument indicating information (ID) or history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code C2, the history information stored so far in the server S in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is stored. , The history information included in the argument part is updated.

  In order to close the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 20 (i-3), the player places the cursor 191a on “End” displayed on the two-dimensional code issuance screen and presses the OK button 192. Then, a warning screen shown in FIG. This warning screen is for confirming whether or not to request redisplay of the two-dimensional code C2, and when the cursor 191a is moved to "Return" and the OK button 192 is pressed, the same figure (i-3). When the user returns to the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 4 and places the cursor 191a on “End” and presses the OK button 192, the screen is switched to the demo screen.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the player who has read the two-dimensional code C2 may leave the gaming table as it is, the history information stored in the gaming table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is deleted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be erased based on the player's operation after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not erase the history information, the history information is You may comprise so that it can return to the reflected game.

  FIG. 20 (ii) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “DATA CLEAR” is selected.

  In the same figure (ii-1), “DATA CLEAR” is selected, and through the warning screen shown in the same figure (ii-2), the results of the current game, the mission achievement status and the original mode points are displayed from the pachinko machine 100. Information representing the accumulated value is deleted (see (ii-3) in the figure). The result of this game is not good, or the mission was completed, but there are times when you want to enjoy the process until the mission is completed again, so you can choose to clear the data. In FIG. 11 (ii-2), a warning is displayed for a person who erroneously selects data clear. As described above, in this embodiment, unless the correct password is input, the original mode is not set, and the history including game results and the like is not saved in the pachinko machine 100. In FIG. 11 (ii-4), a message is displayed for a person who selects “DATA CLEAR” without entering a password. When the screen shown in (ii-3) in the figure and the screen shown in (ii-4) in the figure are displayed for a predetermined time, the screen is switched to the demonstration screen.

  FIG. 20 (iii) is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when “end” is selected.

  In FIG. 6 (iii-1), “End” is selected, and the screen is switched to the demo screen.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a table summarizing the missions prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is a gaming machine A, and FIG. 21A also shows the mission of the gaming machine B described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 1-No. There are 24 missions listed. These missions correspond to predetermined tasks in the game, more specifically, tasks for acquiring a privilege.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game is advanced with the original mode set, when the mission shown in FIG. 21A is achieved, an original mode point predetermined for each mission is given, The original mode point can be used in common on the gaming table A and the gaming table B. That is, the original mode points acquired on the gaming table A can be used as they are on the gaming table B, and the original mode points acquired on the gaming table B can also be used on the gaming table A as they are. FIG. 21 (a) also shows values of original mode points predetermined for each mission. The value of the original mode point here is common to the gaming table A and the gaming table B. In other words, the profit (here, the number of points) given by the achievement of the predetermined mission in the gaming machine A is the same as the profit given by the achievement of the predetermined mission in the gaming machine B. In addition, the mission conditions in the gaming table A of this embodiment and the missions in the different types of gaming tables B have the same (common) achievement conditions. In addition, there are game tables A and B that have the same degree of difficulty in achieving the same mission, but the game table A has a relatively large jackpot probability but a relatively large maximum number of balls. On the other hand, the game table B is a sweet digital machine with a relatively high jackpot probability but a relatively small maximum number of balls to be played. The achievement difficulty level referred to here is an achievement difficulty level common to a plurality of types of game machines calculated in the design stage in consideration of specifications such as a jackpot probability between a plurality of types of game machines. FIG. 21A also shows the achievement difficulty level. The achievement difficulty level is represented by symbols S, A, B, and C, and means that the mission difficulty level is the same for missions that have the same symbol. The same level includes not only the case where the achievement probabilities are completely the same, but also the case where they are substantially the same (for example, within ± 10%). S in FIG. 21A represents that it is very difficult to achieve. To achieve this, 100,000 games must be played as a guide. A indicates that it is difficult to achieve. To achieve this, it is necessary to play 10,000 games as a guide. B represents that the achievement is relatively easy, and 3000 games may be played as a guide to achieve it. C represents that it is very easy to achieve and can be achieved immediately.

  The number of acquired balls (No. 1, 2) is a cumulative value of the number of winning balls acquired in the game in which the original mode is set. Even if the day is different or the game machine store is different, the number of prize balls in the game performed with the original mode set is accumulated. The game table B is a sweet digital machine with a relatively high hit probability but a relatively small maximum number of balls, so the difficulty level is relatively low, but the maximum number of balls is relative It is harder to achieve than the gaming machine A which is a large number of MAX machines. The same applies to the cumulative number of big hits (No. 5, 6) and the cumulative number of games (No. 7, 8). Note that the cumulative number of games is a condition that does not depend on the probability or the like set for the game machine. In such a condition, the achievement difficulty level is almost the same for multiple types of game machines, but the gauge configuration, stage It is not exactly the same due to performance and nail adjustment.

  The other missions (Nos. 3, 4, 9-18, 20-24) shown in FIG. 21 (a) are achieved if they can be accomplished even once in the game in which the original mode is set.

  The number of consecutive resorts means the number of times that the winning of the special figure is repeatedly won while the number of balls is not reduced. Therefore, repeatedly winning the special figure jackpot during the electric support state is equivalent to a retreat. For example, in the case of winning a big hit continuously during the electric support state, a consecutive resort is also established when winning a big hit with electric support of the special figure with one or more gaps between special figures To do. Moreover, even if it is a non-electric support state, while it is in a probable variation state, it is equivalent to consecutive resorts to win a big hit of a special figure repeatedly. Game table B with a smaller denominator of jackpot probability is easier to achieve than game table A.

  One game renso is achieved when the big win comes from the first symbol change after the big hit game ends.

  Hamari means that games that are not big hits are played continuously. An error is a mission that, when achieved, gives the original mode point, but gives some penalty. The ball removal error notification for 180 seconds or more is established when the player does not operate the ball discharge lever 132 shown in FIG. 1 for 180 seconds in spite of the ball removal error notification being performed by the pachinko machine 100. . In addition, the movable body accessory malfunction error is an error that occurs without being attributed to the player.

  In addition, the premier effect cannot be achieved with this game machine A, but can only be achieved with game machine B (No. 17), and cannot be achieved with game machine A or game machine B. This is the condition (No. 18) that can be achieved only with the model X of the spinning machine (slot machine) having a different game format. That is, mission no. 17 is a game table B of a different type from the game table A. When No. 17 is achieved, the mission no. No. 17 was achieved, but it was achieved. No. 18 is a mission table of a different type of gaming machine (slot machine model X) from the gaming machine A. When 18 is achieved, the mission No. Even if 18 is not achieved, it is achieved. In addition, with respect to achievement of a mission that cannot be achieved on the gaming machine A, a synergistic effect is further exerted by adopting a configuration that gives a bonus (such as an image having a higher rarity value) than a privilege given when other missions are achieved. I can expect that.

  In addition, the episode effect is achieved when a large-scale behavior opportunity has arrived that triggers development to a predetermined effect called an episode effect in a state where a princess is selected in a character appearance custom described later. In the episode production and the optional selection system, conditions that cannot be achieved unless the original mode is set are defined. In addition, episode production and optional system No22-No. No. 24 is a requirement that cannot be achieved with the gaming table B but can be achieved only with the gaming table A. These missions depend on game characteristics and the like.

  Note that if only one of the gaming table A and the gaming table B is made advantageous in terms of difficulty, the player may concentrate only on the advantageous gaming table, so that one mission is achieved. It is preferable that the game table A is advantageous in terms of conditions, and that the game table B is advantageous in terms of achievement of another mission different from that.

  In addition, in order to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine whose operating rate has declined over time since it was installed in the game store, the mission achievement difficulty level for other types of gaming machines installed later is set in advance. It may be higher than the game table. By doing so, the game machine installed in the front can easily achieve the mission, and the operating rate of the game machine set up in front is improved. Also, customs in the original mode, which will be described later, can be lifted immediately after the installation of the game machine installed later, due to mission completion.

  Furthermore, the achievement difficulty level may be adjusted by the player's clerk. As a result, it is possible to take advantage of the gaming machine whose operation has been reduced. In such a case, the operation cannot be performed by the player, and can be performed at a position where only the store clerk can operate (for example, the above-described original mode selection switch 161) or an operation method (for example, using a key). It is desirable to configure.

  Furthermore, by setting the maximum number of missions (24 in FIG. 21 (a)) in common among multiple models, the mission achievement status when the password issued by one model is input to the other model Can be easily updated.

  In addition, in the table shown in FIG. 21 (a), points to be given to the player are determined for each mission. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while preparing a common number of points in a plurality of missions, It is also possible to respond by setting a point conversion rate in advance. For example, mission no. Even if 1 is achieved, mission no. Even if 2 is achieved, 10 points are prepared as common points. 1, the conversion rate is set to 1.0, and 10 points × 1.0 = 10 points are given when the password of the server S is issued. 2, the conversion rate may be set to 0.7, and 10 points × 0.7 = 7 points may be given when the server S issues a password.

  FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a mission achievement status table stored in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The RAM 408 contains a mission number. 1-No. 24 areas corresponding to 24 are divided, and “0” is stored when the mission is not achieved. When the mission is achieved, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 stores “1” in the area corresponding to the achieved mission and updates the mission achievement status table. In addition, the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 stores a value of an original mode point that is predetermined for each mission. The RAM 408 also stores the cumulative value of the original mode point, and the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 stores the value of the original mode point corresponding to the completed mission in the RAM 408 each time the mission is achieved. Is added to the accumulated value, and the accumulated value of the original mode point is updated. Information representing the mission achievement status (task achievement status information) based on the mission achievement status table and information representing the accumulated value of the original mode points (point cumulative information) are included in the history information. The accumulated value (number of acquired points) of the original mode is a privilege necessary for lifting the custom of the original mode. In the present embodiment, it is not questioned what kind of game table and which mission have been achieved in order to acquire the original mode point, so that the degree of freedom of selection of the game table by the player can be expanded. Also, if a player plays a single game stand for a long time in order to accomplish many missions, he may get bored, but by playing multiple types of game tables multiple times in a short time, There are cases where missions can be achieved one by one, and player boredom can be prevented. Furthermore, in FIG. 21 (a), only the gaming table A and the gaming table B are shown, but other types of gaming tables can be given the original mode points in the same manner by achieving the mission shown in FIG. As the number of corresponding game tables increases, the player's selectivity of the game table expands.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a table that summarizes customizations that can be performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 1-No. Twenty-four customized contents are written. An operation in which the pachinko machine 100 performs a customized effect corresponds to an example of a specific operation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the appearance of a predetermined character appearing on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be changed. For example, a helmet can be put on or a sword can be held. If the original mode is set, the predetermined character appears wearing a spear before winning the special figure jackpot at the time of initial registration. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a specific operation unit. On the other hand, in a state where the original mode is not set, the predetermined character does not appear with a spear unless a special figure is hit. Further, the original mode is set, and the mission No. shown in FIG. If 4 is achieved, a predetermined character can have a sword. Whether or not to give a sword to a predetermined character is a member's freedom to register as a member. If a predetermined character wants to have a sword, it accesses the customization page of the server S and puts a sword on the predetermined character. The customization based on the result of the customization is acquired from the server S and the result of the customization is reflected on the pachinko machine 100, or a customization page prepared for the pachinko machine 100 described later is called to Set customization to have a sword in your character. The information set in the customization page is reflected in the history information stored in the server S, and the next time the password is obtained, the history in which the setting for giving a predetermined character a sword is reflected in the password. Information is included. On the other hand, in the original mode non-setting state, when the number of consecutive resorts is reached 10 times or more, a predetermined character always comes with a sword. The mission No. shown in FIG. No. 4 is achieved when the original mode is set, and the number of consecutive resorts is 5 or more. Therefore, when the original mode is set, a chance of giving a predetermined character a sword is easier to obtain. In addition, if the original mode is set, once the number of consecutive resorts is achieved 5 times or more, a predetermined character can be freely given at any time thereafter, but in the original mode non-setting state, Even if the number of consecutive resorts is 10 times or more, if the table is changed, a predetermined character cannot have a sword unless the number of consecutive resorts is 10 times or more.

  In addition, No. of the character appearance custom. 4, the mission No. shown in FIG. 1 is a condition. As described above, the mission No. is set in the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) which is the MAX machine of the present embodiment. Since it is difficult to achieve No. 1, Mission No. The person who achieves 1 can easily release the change of the character image to the princess image.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sound emitted from the speaker 120 is changed (sound custom), the lighting pattern of a decorative lamp such as a frame lamp is changed (lamp lighting pattern custom), FIG. Change the movement of the shielding device 246 and the production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 5 (modification of custom character action data), or change the moving image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to be displayed at a timing not originally displayed. (Movie custom), you can specify the opponent in the battle mode effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (battle mode custom), you can also change the decorative symbol (decorative symbol custom) It is. Among these customs, No. of sound custom, lamp lighting pattern custom, accessory operation data custom, and decorative design custom. 20 and no. 21 is an effect that can only be changed by accessing the customization page of the server S or calling and setting a customization page prepared in the pachinko machine 100 described later, and does not appear in the original mode non-setting state. is there.

  In addition, no. 13 and no. No. 14, in the original mode setting state, the month and day are started earlier than in the original mode non-setting state.

  Furthermore, in the battle mode custom, a notice effect with different big hit expectation can be fixedly executed by setting the original mode. The degree of expectation of jackpot depends on the opponent in battle mode. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the opponent is set to have a higher degree of expectation for jackpot than Sasuke than Deca Taro, and the expectation degree for jackpot is higher than Sasuke than Sasuke.

  In addition, No. of the decorative design custom. No. 19 allows customization when the cumulative value of the original mode points exceeds 10 points. No. 20 is allowed to be customized when its accumulated value exceeds 50 points. The customization of 21 is permitted when the accumulated value exceeds 100 points. No. of these decorative design customs. In the case of 19 only, even when the original mode is not set, it is executed when the predetermined effect shown in FIG.

  Further, in the special image display custom, if the customization is performed on the customization page of the server S, the two-dimensional code for the standby image present may be displayed as it is, and the customization page prepared in the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. 2D code may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but a special (rare value) image may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the two-dimensional code. You may make it display.

  The contents that can be customized between different types of game machines, that is, the specifications of the original mode may be different.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (i-1) or the like, the OK button 192 shown in FIG. 19A is long with the menu window 610 and the customization guide 620 additionally displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When pressed, a page related to customization is called.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a customization related page prepared in the pachinko machine 100.

  In FIG. 9A, the OK button 192 is pressed and held to open the menu screen for the customization related page (see FIG. 10B). On this menu screen, the specification of the original mode can be changed and the original mode setting information can be confirmed. Selection on the menu screen is performed by operating the cross key 191 and the OK button 192 shown in FIG.

  The specification change in the original mode is for changing the contents of customization, and this change is performed on the customization page of the server S. However, in the present embodiment, it can also be performed on the pachinko machine 100. However, if a long time is required for the change, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 100 is lowered. Therefore, the specification change in the pachinko machine 100 may be prohibited, and the specification change may be performed only on the customization page of the server S. Further, whether or not customization can be performed in the pachinko machine 100 may be selectable by the above-described original mode selection switch 161. In this embodiment, when the original mode specification change is selected, the customization page shown in FIGS. In the customization page shown in FIG. 22C, three customization systems corresponding to “system” in the table shown in FIG. 22 are shown. When the cursor is moved to the down arrow key 621 and the OK button 192 is pressed, the following three systems are shown. Here, when the cursor is moved to the upward arrow key (not shown) and the OK button 192 is pressed, the previous three systems are displayed. Is displayed. The customized system displayed here is limited to a system that can be set based on the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the mission No. shown in FIG. When only 21 is achieved, “battle mode custom” is not displayed. Selection of the customizing system is performed by operating the cross key 191 and the OK button 192. In FIG. 23C, “Sound Custom” is selected, and the customization page shown in FIG. 23D is displayed. In the customization page shown in FIG. 10D, “custom name” in the table shown in FIG. 22 is shown. The custom names displayed here are also limited to those that can be set based on the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, when all the missions shown in FIG. 21A are not achieved, the system voice “bancho” is not displayed. The custom name is also selected by operating the cross key 191 and the OK button 192. The history information includes original mode specification information, that is, information indicating what kind of customization is performed. In FIG. 23D, “system voice“ Princess ”” is selected, and the specification information of the original mode in the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 is updated to “system voice“ Princess ””. When the cursor is placed on the “return” display and the OK button 192 is pressed, the display returns to the demo screen.

  Here, a plurality of custom sets that collectively store a plurality of custom contents may be stored. By selecting the custom set, it is possible to change the production mode in the pachinko machine 100 in a short time, and to improve the interest of the player without reducing the operation.

  The confirmation of the original mode setting information is for confirming the contents of the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100. When confirmation of the original mode setting information is selected on the screen of FIG. 23B, a confirmation content selection page shown in FIG. In the confirmation content selection page shown in FIG. 5E, the original mode specification, mission achievement status, and personal history information can be selected. The original mode specification is for confirming the content of customization that is currently set (current setting state of image / sound). The mission achievement status is the No. shown in FIG. This is for confirming which of the 1 to 21 missions is achieved. The personal history information is for confirming the history of games played with the original mode set, and includes items related to mission achievement conditions. For example, the number of acquired balls, the number of consecutive homes, the number of accumulated jackpots, the number of accumulated games, and the like are included. In the case of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18, the bonus probability, the number of small roles, and the like are obtained. The confirmation content is also selected by operating the cross key 191 and the OK button 192. In FIG. 23 (e), “original mode specification” is selected, and the confirmation page shown in FIG. 23 (f) is displayed. In the confirmation page shown in FIG. 5F, it is displayed that “system voice“ princess ”” is selected in the sound custom. Also, a sample sound of “system sound“ Princess ”” is output from the speaker 120. On the confirmation page, all the currently set customizations are displayed one screen at a time. When the cursor is placed on the down arrow key 621 and the OK button 192 is pressed, the next customization content is displayed. When the cursor is placed on the up arrow key 622 and the OK button 192 is pressed, the customization content displayed previously is displayed. Is displayed. When the cursor is placed on the “return” display and the OK button 192 is pressed, the display returns to the demo screen.

  Next, the original mode control process (step S1321) in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 17 will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of the original mode control process (step S1321).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the original mode is set by inputting a password. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with an original mode setting flag. When the original mode is set, the original mode setting flag is turned on. First, in step S1321b which is the starting step of the original mode control process, it is determined whether or not the original mode setting flag is turned off. If it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1321f. If it is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1321c. It is determined whether or not a password has been input (see FIG. 19 (ii)). As described above, the password is encrypted, and here, the encrypted password is decrypted and an attempt is made to acquire history information. This password corresponds to an example of individual source information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that executes Step S1321c corresponds to an example of individual source information acquisition means. If the history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, it is not a regular password. If the regular password has not been entered, the original mode control process ends. If the regular password has been entered, the personal setting reflection process is performed (step S1321d). In this personal setting reflection process, the individual setting information included in the password is expanded in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. That is, the individual setting information including the history information is stored so as to be erasable. An operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 19A corresponds to an example of an operation unit, and an input operation of a regular password using the operation key unit 190 corresponds to an example of a predetermined operation. The RAM 408 corresponds to an example of an individual setting information storage unit.

  In step S1321e executed following step S1321d, the original mode setting flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1321f. In step S1321f, it is determined whether or not any of the missions shown in FIG. 21 has been newly achieved. If unsuccessful, the process proceeds to step S1321i, and if any one of the missions has been newly achieved. Mission achievement information update processing is performed (step S1321g). In this mission achievement information update process, information regarding mission achievement in the individual setting information (history information) developed in the RAM 408 is updated. That is, the mission achievement status table shown in FIG. The RAM 408 also has a mission achievement notification flag. In step S1321h, the mission achievement notification flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1321i.

  In step S1321i, it is determined whether or not the mission achievement notification flag is set on. If the mission completion notification flag remains set to off, the process proceeds to step S1321m. If it is set on, it is determined whether or not the mission achievement notification is triggered. Is determined (step S1321j). The execution trigger of the mission achievement notification is predetermined in the ROM 406, and may be, for example, the moment when the mission is achieved or the end of the big hit game. Further, in the case of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18, the mission achievement notification may be executed at a predetermined timing, such as at the end of a period when the expected value of the player such as ART is high, or the mission achievement is achieved. When the notification is not executed, the mission achievement notification is executed at an irregular timing, such as executing the mission completion notification based on the above-mentioned menu being called by the player's operation. May be. Moreover, you may perform mission achievement alert | report based on both the predetermined opportunity and an irregular opportunity. If it is not the execution trigger of the mission achievement notification, the process proceeds to step S1321m, and if it is the execution trigger, the mission completion notification effect is set (step S1321k). If it is a notification effect using the decorative symbol display device 208, a control command instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform the notification effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the notification effect using the speaker 120 is transmitted. If there is, an instruction to perform a notification effect is output to the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. In addition, when a plurality of missions are achieved, mission achievement notification effects may be performed in the order of time series of achievement, or the priority order of notification effects is determined in advance for each mission, and the notification effects are performed based on the priority order. You may go. Further, the mission achievement notification effect may be canceled by a game progress operation. For example, in the case of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18, another effect is started by a bet operation, a start lever ON operation, or the like. Therefore, priority is given to the other effect, and the mission achievement notification effect is canceled. Also good. This mode is a mode in which priority is given to the operation related to profit (game operation). In step S1321l executed subsequent to step S1321k, the mission achievement notification flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1321m.

  In step S1321m, an individual game history update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1321n. In this personal game history update process, there are a case where a history of a period from setting to release of an original mode in the current game is acquired, and a case where a history of accumulated games in the model is acquired. In any case, the history information of the individual setting information developed in the RAM 408 is updated to the acquired information. For example, the cumulative value of the above-mentioned original mode points is updated according to the mission achievement status. In step S1321g and step S1321n described above, the individual setting information stored in the RAM 408 is updated as the game progresses. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that executes Step S1321g and Step S1321n corresponds to an example of an individual setting information update unit.

  In step S1321n, it is determined whether or not there has been a specification change request for the original mode. Here, it is determined whether or not an operation for changing the contents of customization using the operation key unit 190 as described with reference to FIGS. 23C and 23D is performed. The process proceeds to step S1321p. If it is performed, the original mode setting is changed (step S1321o), and the process proceeds to step S1321p. As described above, the history information includes original mode specification information, that is, information indicating what kind of customization is performed. In the original mode setting changing process in step S1321o, the original mode specification information in the history information developed in the RAM 408 is updated. This makes it possible to change the appearance rate of a specific image or sound. For example, when the original mode is not set, a relatively low appearance rate is increased when the original mode is set (when the appearance rate of rare effects increases), or unless the original mode is set. There is a case where an effect with no appearance mode, that is, an effect with an appearance rate of 0% can be made appearing when the original mode is set (the appearance rate becomes 1% or more).

  In step S1321p, it is determined whether an original mode setting information confirmation request has been received. Here, as described with reference to FIGS. 23 (e) and 23 (f), has the operation for confirming the contents of the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 (RAM 408) using the operation key unit 190 been performed? If it has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1321r. If it has been performed, an original mode setting information notification process is performed (step S1321q), and the process proceeds to step S1321r. In the original mode setting information notifying process in step S3211q, a control command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display information based on the history information developed in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. Also, as shown in FIG. 23 (f), in the case of outputting sample sound from the speaker 120, the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 4 is instructed to output sample sound.

  In step S1321r, it is determined whether the original mode end condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not an operation for issuing a two-dimensional code has been performed using the operation key unit 190 as described with reference to FIG. The operation for issuing a two-dimensional code using the operation key unit 190 (the operation shown in FIGS. 20 (i-1) to (i-2)) is performed when the setting of the original mode is canceled (terminated). It is an operation and corresponds to an example of a specific operation. When this operation is performed, the original mode end condition is satisfied. The original mode end condition corresponds to an example of a specific condition. Even if the player does not perform such an end selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 makes sure that the original mode end condition is satisfied a predetermined amount before the closing time of the game store by the timer management. May be. When the original mode end condition is not satisfied, the original mode control process is ended, and when the original mode end condition is satisfied, the original mode reflected image generation process is performed (step S1321s). In this original mode reflected image generation processing, a two-dimensional code C2 (see FIG. 20 (i-3)) including history information and the like stored so far stored in the RAM 408 is generated. The two-dimensional code C2 generated here includes personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and an update reception page prepared in the server S. URL is included. The two-dimensional code generated here corresponds to an example of conversion information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that executes Step S1321s corresponds to an example of conversion information generation means. Note that the password is not limited to a two-dimensional code, and may be, for example, a password made up of a series of numbers and symbols, and the personal setting information including history information is reflected by inputting the password as it is to the gaming machine at the next game. You may comprise as follows.

  In step S1321t executed following step S1321s, a control command instructing to display the two-dimensional code C2 generated in step S1321s on the decorative symbol display device 208 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display is performed. The device 208 displays a two-dimensional code C2 as shown in FIG. 20 (i-3). Next, the personal setting information stored in the RAM 408 is erased from the RAM 408 (step S321u), and the original mode control process ends. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that executes Step S1321u corresponds to an example of an individual setting information erasing unit. By forcibly deleting the individual setting information, the individual setting information of the previous player is forgotten to be deleted, and the individual setting information of the previous player is included in the individual setting information of the next player. There are cases where it can be prevented. For a player who enjoys the mission achievement itself, if the mission is cleared by another person, the sense of accomplishment may not be experienced and the interest may be reduced. In addition, if all of the game history in the period when the individual setting information is set is included in the two-dimensional code, the history information will be displayed when the player is changed while the individual setting information is set. Is no longer correct. However, according to the present embodiment, such things are unlikely to occur. Here, the personal setting information is erased after displaying the original mode reflected image (two-dimensional code C2). However, as shown in FIG. 20 (ii), “DATA CLEAR” for erasing the personal setting information is selected from the menu. In such a case, the personal setting information is deleted without displaying the original mode reflected image. In addition, when the original mode is set, that is, when the personal setting information is stored in the RAM 408, the personal setting information stored so far is erased from the RAM 408 by inputting the password again. You may comprise.

  Next, server control processing executed by the server S shown in FIG. 18 will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the flow of server control processing.

  The server S illustrated in FIG. 18 corresponds to an example of an external storage device. The server S first determines whether or not a predetermined URL (URL of the update reception page here) has been accessed (step S1801). The URL here is a URL included in the two-dimensional code issued by the game machine, and the argument part added to the URL includes personal identification information (ID) and individual setting information. . The server S performs member verification (personal identification) based on whether or not personal identification information (ID) included in the argument portion is stored. Alternatively, a password may be displayed on the game stand side at the end of the game, and an individual may be specified based on the input of the password on the network. In addition, in order to prevent multiple use of the same two-dimensional code, an individual identification number unique to a mobile phone terminal, an IP address unique to a personal computer, etc., which has been accessed are calculated on the server side, and the individual identification number and IP address determined You may make it regulate other than access. If there is no access, the process proceeds to step S1803. If there is access, the stored individual setting information (history information) is converted into the individual setting information (history information) included in the argument part added to the accessed URL. Based on the update (step S1802), the process proceeds to step S1803. The individual setting information (history information) included in the argument part added to the accessed URL includes information such as the number of games in the game, the mission achievement status, and the cumulative value of the original mode points. .

  In step S1803, it is determined whether there is a customization request. That is, when the customization page of the server S is accessed and personal identification information (ID) is input, a request to change the specification information of the original mode in the history information stored corresponding to the personal identification information It is determined that there was. If there is no customization request, the process proceeds to step S1805. If there is a customization request, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S804, the contents of customization are changed based on the operation of the accessor on the customization page of the server S, and the specification information of the original mode in the stored history information is updated based on the changed contents of customization. The process proceeds to step 1S805. That is, in step S1804, the “system” in the table shown in FIG. 22 can be set in the same manner as can be done on the game machine.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether a password issuance request has been received. That is, when the password issuance page of the server S is accessed and personal identification information (ID) is input, it is determined that a password issuance request has been made. If there is no password issuance request, the process proceeds to step S1807, and if there is a request, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, an encrypted password is generated and issued, and the process advances to step S1807. In the password generation, the individual setting information stored corresponding to the input personal identification information is encrypted, and a password including the encrypted individual setting information is generated. In the issuance of a password, processing is performed so that the generated password is displayed on an external device (for example, a mobile phone terminal) of a person who has requested password issuance. The password issued here may be a password that can be input to a plurality of models, or may be a password that can be input only to a selected model by selecting a model on the server S. At the same time as issuing the password, the status of the selected model is set to “in game” on the server S. If the status is other than “in game”, the predetermined URL (here, the URL of the update reception page) ) May be invalidated even if accessed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent other person's personal data from being overwritten on his / her own personal data.

  In step S1807, display control of personal data, transmission control of a standby image, a ringtone melody, and the like based on the mission achievement status are performed, and the server control process ends.

  The individual setting information (history information) stored in the server S may be changed by the administrator setting of the server S. For example, a lottery or the like may be performed, and the individual setting information of the winning player may be changed to advantageous information, so that a condition that cannot be achieved simply by playing a normal game may be set as achieved. The game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 performs a specific operation based on the fact that a condition that cannot be achieved by the game itself has been achieved.

  Further, on the game machine side such as the pachinko machine 100, it is impossible to change the contents of customization using the operation key unit 190 as described with reference to FIGS. 23 (c) and 23 (d). In order to reduce information input to a gaming machine such as 100, the password generated on the server S may not include information indicating the mission achievement status. A game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 includes information indicating the mission achievement status in the current game in the argument part added to the URL included in the two-dimensional code every time. In step S1802, the server S acquires information indicating the mission achievement status, and stores the information indicating the mission achievement status newly acquired this time and the personal identification information (ID) so far. The mission accomplishment mission in this game is detected by taking a difference from the information representing the mission achievement status.

  Subsequently, the mission No. shown in FIG. No. 9 of the special image display custom shown in FIG. A method for acquiring the 22 standby images will be described.

  FIG. No. 9 was achieved and no. It is the figure which showed the method of acquiring 22 standby images. FIG. 26 shows a pachinko machine 100 (game table A) according to the present embodiment and a game machine B having different specifications from the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In FIG. However, as described above, the gaming table A and the gaming table B have the same hardware elements.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 (game table A) according to the present embodiment is a MAX machine with a relatively low big hit probability but a relatively large maximum number of balls. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the mission no. The achievement difficulty level of 9 is A indicating that the achievement is difficult, and the achievement probability is 1/399.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine B having a spec different from that of the gaming machine A is a sweet digital machine having a relatively high jackpot probability but a relatively small maximum number of balls. The mission No. on this game stand B The achievement difficulty level of 9 is B indicating that achievement is relatively easy, and the achievement probability is considerably increased to 1/87.

  Therefore, it is difficult to achieve the mission No. on the game machine A. 9 can be achieved, and a standby image can be acquired. No. 9 was achieved and mission no. By acquiring a two-dimensional code including the achievement of 9 from the gaming table B, temporarily storing it in the server S, having the server S issue a password, and entering the password in the gaming table A The stand-by image can also be acquired on the gaming table A.

  In the example described above, the mission achievement conditions are the same, and the benefits given by the achievement of the mission are the same, but the achievement difficulty is different. That is, mission no. There are two achievement conditions of 9; one is achievement of the predetermined condition in the gaming machine A, and the other is achievement of the predetermined condition in the gaming machine B. These multiple conditions have different achievement difficulty levels. The player is assigned a mission no. A method for achieving 9 can be selected. It should be noted that the mission No. on the game table B is shown. The profit given by the achievement of 9 is the mission No. It may be different from the benefits given by achieving 9.

  According to the gaming table A of the present embodiment, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the gaming table B as well. In other words, since there is a relationship between a plurality of models having different specifications, it is possible to input individual setting information on the interest of the player who played the game on one game machine (here game machine A). The operation rate can be increased synergistically by making it point to the other game machine (here game machine B). More specifically, it is a case where individual setting information can be input between a plurality of game machines having different specifications (here, game machine A and game machine B), and a game is played on any game machine. However, since the individual setting information can be updated, the operation of a plurality of game machines may be improved without concentrating the player's operation only on one game machine.

  Also, if the mission achievement conditions are the same among multiple game machines with different specifications, there may be differences in the difficulty of accomplishing the mission. In this case, the player has the difficulty level he desires. If you want to achieve the mission, you will have freedom of choice. Also, for example, when selling a gaming machine with different specifications as a subsequent machine after selling a predetermined gaming machine, increasing the difficulty of achieving the succeeding machine increases the operation of the preceding machine after a while. There is a case that can be made.

  Subsequently, the mission achievement conditions are the same (same) between multiple types of gaming machines (between gaming machines with different specifications), but the mission achievement difficulty may be different, and the benefits given by mission achievement are also different. A first modification as an example will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a table summarizing missions in the first modification.

  Also in FIG. 1-No. 24 missions are recorded, and the achievement conditions are No. shown in FIG. 1-No. Same as 24 missions. Moreover, although the achievement difficulty level is not shown in the table shown in FIG. 27, the achievement difficulty level of each mission is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Also in this first modification, the gaming machine A is a MAX machine, and the gaming machine B is a sweet digital machine, but the original mode points acquired in the gaming machine A can be used as it is on the gaming machine B, and the gaming machine The original mode points acquired in B can also be used on the game machine A as they are. That is, the cumulative value (number of acquired points) in the original mode is assigned to the user and can be used in common for a plurality of types of game machines. However, the value of the original mode point in the first modification may be different between the gaming table A and the gaming table B. That is, the profit (here, the number of points) given by the achievement of the predetermined mission in the gaming machine A may be different from the profit given by the achievement of the predetermined mission in the gaming machine B. In the first modification, the number of original mode points is in accordance with the degree of difficulty in achieving the mission. Referring to FIG. 21 (a), the number of mission points given S in FIG. 21 (a), which indicates that it is very difficult to achieve, is 10, which is difficult to achieve. The number of mission points with A representing 7 is 7 and the number of missions with B representing 5 is relatively easy to achieve. The number of points of a mission with C as represented is two.

  As in the first modification described above, by matching the difficulty level of achievement of missions for each corresponding mission, depending on the specifications of the game machine, one game machine can easily achieve the mission, On the other hand, there is no case where an unfair feeling that the mission is difficult to achieve is generated, and it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating on one game table.

  In the first modified example, the number of points is determined for each type of gaming table. However, the number of points is not limited to this. For example, while a common number of points is prepared for a plurality of types of gaming tables, A point conversion rate can be set in advance for each type. For example, when a predetermined mission is achieved, 10 points are prepared as common points. In the gaming machine A which is a MAX machine, the conversion rate is set to 1.0, and when the server S password is issued, 10 points × 1.0 = 10 points. The game table B, which is a sweet digital machine, may be given a conversion rate of 0.3 and 10 points × 0.3 = 3 points may be given when the server S issues a password.

  In the server S, the magnification of the accumulated value (number of acquired points) in the original mode may be changeable. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in operation by conducting campaigns such as doubling points for a predetermined period, or setting points of models that have started to decline more favorably than other models. There is a case. Further, the point magnification change may be performed not only on the server S side but also on the game stand side. For example, it may be set on the gaming machine side so as to gradually increase the point multiplication rate after a predetermined period has elapsed since shipment or installation.

  Next, a description will be given of a second modification, which is an example in which the mission achievement conditions are made different by changing the mission achievement conditions among a plurality of types of game machines (game machines having different specifications).

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a table summarizing missions in the second modified example.

  Also in FIG. 1-No. There are 24 missions listed.

  Also in this second modified example, the gaming machine A is a MAX machine and the gaming machine B is a sweet digital machine, but the original mode points acquired by the gaming machine A can be used as it is on the gaming machine B, The original mode points acquired in B can also be used on the game machine A as they are.

  In the second modification, the mission No. In 1 to 6 etc., the achievement difficulty is the same between the gaming table A and the gaming table B although the achievement conditions are different.

  Further, for example, the mission No. shown in FIG. In 1 to 8, when a predetermined achievement condition is achieved in a different kind of game machine B from the game machine A, it is achieved even if the achievement condition in the game machine A is not satisfied. Here, Mission No. In Nos. 1 to 6, although the achievement conditions on the game machine A and the achievement conditions on the game machine B are different, the mission No. In 7 and 8, both achievement conditions are the same. By providing such a mission, it may be possible to improve the operation of the game machine itself that the player aims at while actively improving the operation of the related model.

  Further, the mission No. shown in FIG. 17 (Premier production) can be achieved even with this game machine A. Mission No. 18 (Premier effect) can also be achieved on both the gaming table A and the gaming table B. Furthermore, the optional system No22-No. 24, it can be achieved even with the game table B. As described above, all the missions in the second modified example can be achieved by either the game machine A or the game machine B. However, the game table A and game table B with different specifications have the same probability of accomplishing the mission, so that the probability of winning a big hit and the number of balls in a single big hit (for example, the maximum number of balls that can be obtained in the big hit) There are missions that are calculated from the number of balls) and the like, and the achievement conditions on the gaming machine A and the achievement conditions on the gaming machine B are different. In this second modified example, the amount of profit given by the achievement of the mission is made the same because the achievement difficulty of the mission is made uniform between the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B. In other words, the number of original mode points awarded when the mission is achieved is the same whether the predetermined mission is achieved on the gaming machine A or the gaming machine B.

  Next, a third modification for issuing a plurality of types of passwords will be described.

  FIG. 29A is a diagram for explaining the exchange of passwords in the third modified example.

  In the third modification, the password is issued without going through the server S. That is, the game machine issues a password made up of alphanumeric characters and the like instead of the two-dimensional code. In the gaming table A shown in FIG. 29A (for example, the model title is “Pachinko-san”), a 5-digit password (25 bits) selected from 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols and created in the first encryption format. Equivalent). On the other hand, the gaming machine N shown in FIG. 29 (a) is a new series of gaming machines A shown in the figure (for example, the model title is “Pachinko New Tono-sama”). Due to the increase, an 8-digit password (corresponding to 48 bits) selected from 64 alphanumeric characters, symbols and katakana and created in the second encryption format is issued.

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 19 (ii-2), the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a password input screen for inputting a password. In the gaming table A shown in FIG. 29A, a five-digit password (corresponding to 25 bits) selected from 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols and created in the first encryption format can be input. On the other hand, the gaming machine N shown in FIG. 29 (a) is a new series of gaming machines A shown in the same figure (for example, Pachinko New, Tono-sama). An 8-digit password (corresponding to 48 bits) selected from 64 alphanumeric characters, symbols and katakana and created in the second encryption format can be input.

  The old series of gaming machines A can accept a 5-digit password created in the first encryption format, but cannot accept an 8-digit password created in the second encryption format. On the other hand, the new series of game consoles N can accept a 5-digit password created in the first encryption format and an 8-digit password created in the second encryption format. In this way, the new series of gaming machines N can input a plurality of passwords, and one password (5-digit password) has less information than the other password (8-digit password). .

  FIG. 29B is a diagram for explaining a password in the third modified example.

  In the password, 8 bits are occupied for the personal identification information, 7 bits are occupied for the original mode point (cumulative value), 10 bits are occupied for the original mode setting information (1), and 10 bits are also used for the completed mission information. Is occupied, and 13 bits are occupied in the original mode setting information (2). Therefore, a 5-digit password equivalent to 25 bits cannot contain all information, and includes only personal identification information, original mode point (cumulative value), and original mode setting information (1). Yes. On the other hand, an 8-digit password equivalent to 48 bits can contain all information, including personal identification information, original mode point (cumulative value), original mode setting information (1), and completed mission information (mission Information indicating the achievement status) and original mode setting information (2). The original mode setting information (1) is information of customization performed based on the achievement of the mission (old mission) employed in the old series of gaming machines A. The original mode setting information (2) includes information on customization performed based on the achievement of the new mission newly adopted in the new series of gaming machines N, not adopted in the old series of gaming machines A, This is information on the result of customization newly added to the customization prepared for the old mission. That is, the 8-digit password includes information that has been used from the latest model due to version upgrades or specification changes.

  In the gaming table A shown in FIG. 29, since the accepted mission information does not include the completed mission information, on the gaming table side, as described with reference to FIGS. 23 (c) and (d), Customization cannot be performed using the operation key unit 190, and customization can be performed only on the server S side. However, in the new series of game consoles N, the accepted mission information is included in the acceptable password. It can also be customized on the game stand side.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the flow of password generation processing in the new series of gaming machines D shown in FIG.

  The password generation process shown in FIG. 30 is a process executed instead of the original mode reflected image generation process (step S1321s) in the original mode control process shown in FIG. In the new series of gaming machines N shown in FIG. 29A, a password issuing screen is prepared instead of the two-dimensional code issuing screen shown in FIG. On this password issue screen, it is possible to select whether to issue an old series password or a new series password. That is, the player can select when issuing a password. In step S1601 shown in FIG. 30, it is determined whether or not there is a request for issuing an old series password. If there is no request for issuing an old series password, the process proceeds to step S1604. move on.

  In step S1602, only the original mode setting information (1) of the original mode setting information (1) and (2) described with reference to FIG. 29B is acquired from the individual setting information stored in the RAM 408. To do. In step S1603 following step S1602, a five-digit password equivalent to 25 bits is generated in the first encryption format using 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols, and the password generation processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1604, both the original mode setting information (1) and (2) are acquired from the individual setting information stored in the RAM 408. In step S1605 subsequent to step S1604, an 8-digit password equivalent to 48 bits is generated in the second encryption format using 64 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and katakana, and the password generation processing ends.

  Even if a password is not generated with a different encryption method, if the encryption method installed in the succeeding machine such as the new series of gaming machines includes the encryption system of the preceding machine such as the old series of gaming machines, etc. For example, the last five digits of the password generated by the succeeding machine may be input to the preceding machine.

  The server S has also been upgraded so that an 8-digit password can be issued (see step S1806 shown in FIG. 25) corresponding to this new series of game consoles N. A process similar to the password generation process in the gaming machine N described with reference to FIG. 30 is performed.

  Furthermore, in the description here, the gaming machine is an example in which the password is issued without going through the server S. However, even if the gaming machine cannot issue the password, only the server S can issue the password. Good. In this case, the old series gaming machine A and the new series gaming machine D may be game machines capable of inputting a plurality of types of passwords having different information holding amounts.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a spinning cylinder using a medal as a game medium. It can also be applied to a gaming machine (slot machine).

  FIG. 31A is an external perspective view of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 18 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The slot machine 900 is an example of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, and includes a main body 901 and a front door 902 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 901 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 901. Inside the center of the main body 901 (not shown in FIG. 22A), three reels (a left reel 910, a middle reel 911, and a right reel 912) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed and slotted. It is configured to be able to rotate inside the machine 900. These reels 910 to 912 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31 (a), each symbol is printed on a belt-like member at an appropriate interval, and the belt-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 910 to 912. Has been. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 910 to 912 are generally displayed three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 913 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 910 to 912, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 910 to 912 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 900, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back surface of each of the reels 910 to 912, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 31A) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 913 is disposed. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 900, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 910 to 912. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 910 to 912 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 920 is a lamp indicating a winning line 914 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 914. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal win line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 914 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 923 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 924 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 922 notifies the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 928 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 930 to 932 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 900. In the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A, every time the bet button 930 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, and when the bet button 931 is pressed, 2 cards are inserted and the bet button 932 is pressed. When it is done, 3 sheets are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 932 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. Note that the game medal insertion lamp 929 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 921 is turned on.

  The medal slot 934 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 930 to 932, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 934. is there. The stored number display 925 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 900. The game information display 926 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 927 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 935 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 910 to 912. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 934 or when the start lever 935 is operated by operating the bet buttons 930 to 932, the reels 910 to 912 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 935 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 900, based on the operation of the start lever 935, an internal lottery process for performing lottery to determine which of the multiple types of winning combination is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 936 is provided with stop buttons 937 to 939. The stop buttons 937 to 939 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 910 to 912 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 935, and are associated with the reels 910 to 912. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 937 to 939 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 937 to 939. When the stop button 937 to 939 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 933 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 934 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 900 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 955. Door key hole 940 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 902 of slot machine 900 is inserted. The medal payout exit 955 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A, the same operation key unit 990 as the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 19A is provided between the MAX bet button 932 and the medal slot 934. . The operation key unit 990 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button.

  The sound hole 960 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 900 to the outside. Side lamps 944 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 902 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 980 is disposed above the front door 902. The effect device 980 includes a door (shutter) member 963 including two right doors 963a and 963b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 957 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 963. When the two right doors 963a and 963b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 957, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 957 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 900 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A includes a big bonus (BIG), a regular bonus (REG), a small combination, and a re-playing combination.

  “Big Bonus (BIG)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “BIG”) is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game, which is a special game, is started by winning. For BIG, the flag is carried over. That is, when a BIG is won internally, a BIG flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit), but even if a BIG is not won in that game, an internal win will be held until a prize is won. The state where the flag indicating is maintained is maintained, and even after the next game, the BIG is in an internal winning state, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the BIG are in a state of winning a prize. The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination.

  The “regular bonus (REG)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “REG”) is a special combination (operating combination) in which a special game is started by winning. For REG, flag carryover is performed in the same manner as BIG. The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the REG. Note that the special gaming state ends when a condition for ending the special gaming state (in this embodiment, the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number) is satisfied, but the predetermined number of BIGs is higher than that of REG. The value set as is a large value. Therefore, BIG provides greater benefits to players than REG. For example, 312 medals are net increased in BIG, and 104 medals are net increased in REG.

  The “re-playing combination” is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows the player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning, and the medal is not paid out.

  The “small role” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning.

  In a general slot machine including the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31A described above, settings can be made at the game store side.

  FIG. 31B is a table showing settings in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG.

  In the BIG column in the table shown in FIG. 31 (b), the probability of internal winning for the special bonus bonus is shown, and the probability of internal winning for the special bonus special bonus for REG vertical disturbance. It is shown. In addition, the table shown in FIG. 31 (b) also shows the combined probability of the internal winning probabilities and the pitch rate. In the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 31 (a), settings can be made over six stages, setting 1 is the setting where the player's profit is least likely to be generated, and setting 6 is the setting where the player's profit is most likely to be generated. is there. In the slot machine, the mission achievement difficulty also changes depending on the setting at the game store side.

  Note that the opportunity to acquire game media in the slot machine is not limited to bonuses (big hits), but increases or decreases depending on operations based on operation suggestions such as assist time (AT), replay time (RT), and assist replay time (ART). To do. For example, it is advantageous for deriving a lottery result having different profits depending on the display mode stopped by the operation result of the stop buttons 937 to 939 and deriving the most advantageous display mode when the lottery result is derived. In some cases, the operating condition is notified over a predetermined period.

  In addition, by setting the original mode, the probability of performing an ART operation suggestion is higher than usual, or the bonus of the internal winning bonus after the internal winning of the bonus is notified early, etc. May be. In other words, a privilege related to this appearance may be given by accomplishing the mission.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a table summarizing missions applied between game machines with different game media.

  In FIG. 1-No. There are 29 missions. A gaming table A shown in FIG. 32 is the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and a gaming table C is the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. In this example as well, the original mode points earned on pachinko machine A can be used as they are on slot machine game B, and the original mode points earned on game machine B can also be used on game machine A as they are. Is possible.

  Mission No. In 1-4, the achievement conditions on the gaming machine A of the pachinko machine 100 and the achievement conditions on the gaming machine C of the slot machine 900 are different. Mission No. 1 and 2, the lending unit price of game media at a game store is usually 4 yen for a pachinko ball and 20 yen for a slot medal. The amount is a condition. That is, the achievement difficulty level is set based on the value of the game medium, and in this example, the achievement difficulty level is made the same by matching the value of the acquired game medium to the same level. Mission No. In cases 3 and 4, when a period advantageous for a player who can easily obtain game media than in the normal state is looped with a predetermined probability (probability rush rate, ART loop rate), the predetermined probability is the same. If there is, it will be the same as the difficulty level of the game console A, so the difficulty level of both is the same.

  In the second modification, the mission No. In 17 (Premier effect), the achievement condition on the gaming machine A of the pachinko machine is the occurrence of the full rotation reach effect, and the achievement condition on the gaming machine C of the slot machine is the occurrence of the freeze effect. Mission No. In 18 (Premier Production), Mission No. When 18 is achieved, the mission No. It was achieved even if 18 was not achieved. When 18 is achieved, the mission number is set on the game stand C. Even if 18 is not achieved, it is achieved. Furthermore, the optional system No22-No. 24, it can be achieved even with the game table C.

  In addition, the model-compatible system No. newly added in this example. 25-No. At 29, the achievement of the mission depends on a gaming table other than its own. Also in this example, the passwords are issued from the game machines A and C without going through the server S. The password issued from the gaming machine includes identification information indicating the type of the issued gaming machine. Mission No. In step 25, the password issued by the gaming machine C is input to the gaming machine A. Mission No. At 26, the reverse is achieved by inputting the password issued by the gaming machine A into the gaming machine C. Mission No. 25 and mission no. In 26, a condition that cannot be achieved with only one type of game machine is simply set. Mission No. 27, this is accomplished by inputting the passwords issued by the gaming table B and the gaming table C to the gaming table A, respectively. In 28, this is achieved by inputting the passwords issued by the gaming table A and the gaming table B to the gaming table C, respectively. Mission No. 27 and mission no. In 28, the achievement condition straddles a plurality of game machines of three or more. Furthermore, the mission No. In order to achieve 29, Mission No. In the state where the password that achieved 1 is input to the gaming machine A, the mission number is set on the gaming machine A. 1 is achieved again, or the mission No. In the state where the password that achieved 1 is input to the gaming machine C, the mission number is set on the gaming machine C. It is necessary to achieve 1 again. As described above, it is also possible to make it a condition to achieve a specific condition on the other gaming machine after achieving a predetermined condition on one gaming machine. In other words, the mission may not be achieved unless a predetermined task in a different kind of game machine is achieved. By providing such a mission, in order to achieve the mission, it is necessary to play games on game machines other than the target game machine, so that the operation of related models can be actively improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  By the way, a password is issued based on the progress of the story at the end of the game, and the story at the end of the previous game can be called by inputting the password, so that the password can be shared between non-identical models. Can be considered. This concept is the same as the game machines A, B, C, and N described so far, in that a password that can be used in common among a plurality of models can be generated, input, and reflected. However, specifications such as the probability of hitting are often different in multiple models with a common password, and even if the difference in specifications is completely ignored and the password can be shared among multiple models, the fun of gaming is improved. However, it is difficult to attract the player's interest in different types of game machines. In addition to the progress of the story, the achievement status of the mission task and the benefits (points) awarded according to the achievement of the task can also be used on different types of game machines, so that different types of games In some cases, the player may be able to attract the player's attention. Furthermore, by using the server S, it is possible to give diversity to the management of individual settings and the issuance of passwords. In the game machines A, B, C, and N described so far, a plurality of models having different specifications are associated with each other, so that one game machine (for example, game machine A) can play a game. By causing the player's interest to be directed to the other game machine (for example, game machines B, C, N) into which the individual setting information can be input, the operation rate can be increased synergistically.

  Note that the password may include two pieces of information: information that can be used in common across a plurality of models (for example, an original mode point) and information indicating the achievement status of a mission in a single model.

  In addition, game media (game balls and game medals) to be used are not compatible between pachinko machines and slot machines having different game formats. As game stores have different cash rates depending on the type of game media, the game media to be used may not be transferred to different game machines. When a common password can be used between the pachinko machine and the slot machine, it is necessary to borrow the game medium again in cash when moving from one type of game machine to the other type of game machine. In other words, it is not possible to play a game with a hand-held game medium. The equivalent exchange store may not be very effective, but the difference in the exchange rate can be expected to be effective as a game store.

  Also, based on the fact that a predetermined period has passed since shipment of game machines and installation at game stores, changes in mission achievement conditions, bans on customization, and the amount of benefits granted to players for mission achievement are different. May be allowed.

  Further, the information included in the password may include a flag indicating whether or not a mission that cannot be achieved by a game machine distributed in the market is achieved, and the mission may be achieved by an event or a campaign.

  In addition, if a mission with a condition that cannot be achieved with its own game stand is installed, and the special performance action is banned based on the achievement of that mission, the player's interest in the game stand that can accomplish that mission Is an effect. In addition, in the own game stand, if the production when the mission is completed is prepared, the interest of the game is further improved.

  Further, the upper limit number of mission types may be determined in common among a plurality of models.

  Furthermore, the benefits given to the player by accomplishing the mission are determined in advance for each game machine corresponding to the mission, so that even if the mission content is the same, the game machine that was playing when it was achieved In some cases, the benefits given to the player can be different. On the other hand, even when different mission contents are achieved, depending on the game stand, the given privilege may be the same.

  In the above description, when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific symbol, the normal gaming state (for example, the lost gaming state) is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A gaming machine that shifts the control state to a high special gaming state (for example, a hit control state), and individual setting information storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) that stores predetermined individual setting information; Individual setting information updating means for updating the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means (for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that executes Step S1321g and Step S1321n), and the individual setting information storage means Specific operation means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 20) for executing a specific operation (for example, a production operation) based on the individual setting information stored in ) And conversion information generation means (for example, first step for executing step S1321s) for generating conversion information (for example, a two-dimensional code) obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format. CPU 404 of the sub-control unit 400) and individual source information acquisition means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 that executes step S1321c) that acquires individual source information (for example, a password) representing the individual setting information based on the conversion information. CPU 404), and the individual setting information storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) is configured so that the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means is the type of the game stand. When the information represents the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the same type (for example, the same specification) game machine In addition to storing the individual setting information based on the acquired individual source information, the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means is different from the type of the game machine at the design stage (for example, different specifications). Even when the information represents individual setting information based on conversion information generated in a different kind of game machine (for example, game machines B, C, and N), the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored. A game stand characterized by being. Is explained.

  Here, the aspect provided with the input means which can input the said individual element information may be sufficient. For example, the aspect provided with the operation means for inputting the enumeration of a number and a character may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the conversion information alerting | reporting means which alert | reports the said conversion information, and the aspect provided with the conversion information output means which outputs the said conversion information may be sufficient.

  The individual setting information may include history information representing a game history.

  The conversion information represents the individual setting information and is information corresponding to the individual information. For example, the password may be a two-dimensional code or a list of numbers and characters. That is, the individual setting information may be encrypted.

  In addition, the individual element information acquisition unit may acquire the individual element information by inputting the individual element information, or may be an external storage medium (for example, a memory) in which the individual element information is stored. The individual source information may be acquired from the external storage medium medium by connecting a card or the like.

  Further, the individual source information may be encrypted information.

  Further, the specific operation means executes a specific operation different from the operation when the individual setting information is not stored in the individual setting information storage means based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means. You may do.

  Further, the specific operation means may be an effect means for performing an effect, and may execute an effect that changes an effect when the individual setting information is not stored as the specific operation. More specifically, the specific operation means is an image display means for displaying an image, and displays an image obtained by changing an effect image when the individual setting information is not stored as the specific operation. Also good. The specific operation means performs a specific effect indicating information related to the player's profit (for example, information suggesting the magnitude of the profit given to the player) as one of the effects. A change effect obtained by changing the information indicated by the specific effect when setting information is not stored may be executed as the specific operation. That is, the degree of the player's profit differs between the information indicated by the change effect and the information indicated by the specific effect. Furthermore, the specific operation means may perform a specific effect that affects a player's profit as one of the effects. That is, the specific operation may be a production operation.

  Furthermore, the relationship between a predetermined game machine and a game machine that is different from the type of the predetermined game machine at the design stage is, for example, a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine that have different game formats. Relationships between gaming machines (slot machines), relationships with different models even in the same game format, relationships with different models and specifications even with the same models, and relationships with different release dates in the same series (for example, the original and original names) "New" and game consoles with second bullets). In addition, the relationship where the specifications differ here is a relationship where the jackpot probability and the bonus probability differ, for example.

  Further, in the description so far, “the individual setting information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) has a plurality of predetermined tasks (for example, missions) in the game as the individual setting information. Information including task achievement status information (for example, information indicating mission achievement status) representing the achievement status of the first setting, and the first sub-control for executing the individual setting information updating means (for example, step S1321g and step S1321n) The CPU 404 of the unit 400 updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task, and the specific operation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) achieves a predetermined task. A specific operation that is permitted to be executed (for example, a production operation) is executed, and a small number of the plurality of tasks are selected. Kutomo One challenge (e.g., each mission the like shown in FIG. 27) the amusement machine where the assignment achievement condition and challenges in different kinds amusement machine is characterized in that it is a common. Is also explained.

  In this case, the individual setting information storage unit is configured to provide a privilege granting situation (for example, accumulation of original mode points) that is given based on the achievement of a task that is predetermined for each task as the individual setting information. Information including privilege grant status information representing a value), and the individual setting information updating means updates the privilege grant status information based on the achievement of the task, and the identification The operation means may execute a specific operation based on the specific provision situation.

  Furthermore, the privilege may be a point, and the specific operation means may execute a specific operation according to the amount of points given.

  Further, in the description so far, “the individual setting information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) has a plurality of predetermined tasks (for example, missions) in the game as the individual setting information. Information including task achievement status information (for example, information indicating mission achievement status) representing the achievement status of the first setting, and the first sub-control for executing the individual setting information updating means (for example, step S1321g and step S1321n) The CPU 404 of the unit 400 updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task, and the specific operation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) achieves a predetermined task. A specific operation that is permitted to be executed (for example, a production operation) is executed, and a small number of the plurality of tasks are selected. At least one task (for example, mission Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 28) is characterized in that the task achievement difficulty level is the same although the task achievement condition is different from the task in the different kind of game machine. To play. Is also explained.

  Here, the same degree means that the task achievement difficulty level may be completely the same or substantially the same between the gaming table and the different kind of gaming table. More specifically, the achievement probabilities may be completely the same or substantially the same (for example, within ± predetermined percentage).

  Further, in the description so far, “the individual setting information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) has a plurality of predetermined tasks (for example, missions) in the game as the individual setting information. Information including task achievement status information (for example, information indicating mission achievement status) representing the achievement status of the first setting, and the first sub-control for executing the individual setting information updating means (for example, step S1321g and step S1321n) The CPU 404 of the unit 400 updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task, and the specific operation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) achieves a predetermined task. A specific operation that is permitted to be executed (for example, a production operation) is executed, and a small number of the plurality of tasks are selected. Kutomo One challenge (e.g., mission No.29 shown in FIG. 32) amusement machine which is characterized in that can not be achieved with not achieving a predetermined object in the different kinds gaming table. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the individual setting information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) has a plurality of predetermined tasks (for example, missions) in the game as the individual setting information. Information including task achievement status information (for example, information indicating mission achievement status) representing the achievement status of the first setting, and the first sub-control for executing the individual setting information updating means (for example, step S1321g and step S1321n) The CPU 404 of the unit 400 updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task, and the specific operation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) achieves a predetermined task. A specific operation that is permitted to be executed (for example, a production operation) is executed, and a small number of the plurality of tasks are selected. If at least one task (for example, mission Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 28) achieves a predetermined task achievement condition in the different kind of gaming machine, it does not satisfy the task achievement condition in this gaming machine. A game stand characterized by the fact that it is also achieved. Is also explained.

  Here, the predetermined task achievement condition and the task achievement condition in this game machine may be the same condition or different conditions.

  Further, in the description so far, “the individual setting information storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) is assigned as the individual setting information in advance for each task (for example, mission). Is stored, and includes information including point total information indicating the total of points given based on the achievement of the individual setting information update means (for example, first sub-control for executing steps S1321g and S1321n) The CPU 404 of the unit 400 updates the point accumulated information based on the achievement of the task, and the specific operation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) adds the accumulated points to the accumulated points. A specific action (for example, a production action) is executed, and the points are assigned to the different kind of game machines. Amusement machine, characterized in that it can also be used. Is also explained.

  Subsequently, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an applicable form to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 33 to 57 are used only in the description of the applicable embodiment described below in principle, and the following description is provided even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS.

[Embodiment 3]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of 3rd Embodiment from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launch handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, an operation unit 136 for receiving various operations by the player, and a ball rental instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store Cormorant comprises a spherical rental operation button 140, and return the operation button 142 for performing a return instruction for balance of the player to the card unit, a spherical rental display unit 144 for displaying the status of the balance and the card unit of the player, the. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 34 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 33 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 35 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, an operation unit sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons (details will be described later) of the operation unit 136, and shielding A sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used. A VDP 434 that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. This voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 402 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the output circuit, game control is started (first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 37A to 37C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 38 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 36, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 37 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 37 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).
In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 37A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the probability variation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first off flag are on. In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I and the second off flag are turned on, respectively, so that the special figure I is in the respective mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data needs to be updated. In such a case, the effect data is updated.

  In step S311, when the pressing of various buttons on the operation unit 136 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the various buttons is performed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. For example, when the member registration on the menu screen is highlighted and the down button 136b of the operation unit 136 is pressed, the member registration is performed. Performs processing to switch highlight display to highlight display of password input.

  In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, a mission achievement determination process (details will be described later) is performed. In step S325, an original mode control process (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process ends.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  In step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-described low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production control processing>
Next, the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process will be described using FIG. 41 and FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process, and FIG. 42 shows an example of the original mode specification table.

  In step S701, the original mode setting information stored in the RAM 408 is acquired. In this embodiment, one or a plurality of original mode setting information is stored in the RAM 408 in association with identification information (password or QR code (registered trademark)) to be described later, and in this step S701, input by the player. One or more original mode setting information corresponding to the identified identification information is acquired from the RAM 408. Here, the original mode specification table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The original mode specification table is a table in which original mode setting information (numerical values starting from 1) and custom contents (custom rendering effects) are stored in association with each other. In addition, the item of “system” in the figure describes the classification of the production mode of the custom production for reference, and the item of “custom name” describes the name of the production mode of the custom production for reference. Is.

  In addition, the item of the appearance condition (original mode is being set / original mode is not being set) indicates a condition in which the original mode setting information can be set. Can be set with the start of the original mode setting, and can be set when the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit while the original mode is not set. In addition, the original mode setting information 2 includes the mission number during the original mode setting. It can be set when 6 is achieved, and can be set when the big hit game is continuously executed 5 times while the original mode is not set. Note that the original mode setting information 4 (changed to the character “bad sect”) is the mission number with the lowest achievement rate (highest difficulty) during the original mode setting. This is a custom effect that can be set when 1 is achieved, and has a high degree of player attention.

  In step S703, the success / failure result of the special figure variable game (in this embodiment, special figure A to special figure J) included in the control command received from the main control unit 300 is acquired. In the next step S705, the above step S701 is obtained. Based on the original mode setting information acquired in step S1 and the result of the special figure variation game acquired in step S703, the mode of the custom effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined. For example, when the original mode setting information is 1 and the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, the effect for the big hit game is performed using the character image with the head covered, and the original mode setting information is 2. When the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, a normal effect is performed using a character image with an eye patch. In the next step S707, after the other effect control process is executed, the process ends.

<Mission achievement judgment process>
Next, the mission achievement determination process (step S323) in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the flow of the mission achievement determination process, and FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the mission specification table.

  In step S801, it is determined whether or not a predetermined mission has been achieved. If it is determined that the mission has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S803, the mission achievement flag corresponding to the accomplished mission is set to ON, If it is determined that is not achieved, the process is terminated. Here, the mission specification table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The mission specification table is a table in which the mission setting information (numerical value starting from 1), the mission achievement condition, the achievement difficulty level, and the original mode point are associated with each other and stored in the RAM 408. In addition, the item of “mission name” in the figure is the description of the mission name for reference.

  For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the mission setting information 1 when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the big hit game is played five times continuously) 30,000 shots OVER (the number of acquired balls is 30000 or more) is selected as an achievement condition, and it is determined in step S801 whether or not the mission achievement condition is satisfied, and the number of acquired balls is 30000 or more. If the number of acquired balls is less than 30000, it is determined that the mission has not been achieved. If it is determined that the mission is achieved, the mission achievement flag corresponding to the accomplished mission is set to ON (in this example, the mission achievement flag corresponding to mission setting information 1 is set to ON) and the mission completed In order to give the player an original mode point corresponding to (10 points in this example), the original mode point is added to the original point associated with the above-described identification information.

  In step S805, the mission achievement flag ON state notification effect is set. Specifically, the mission achievement flag (mission achievement status) stored in the RAM 408 by inputting its own password by displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 or lighting of various lamps, or the updated original point (For example, the number of mission setting information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate the contents of the mission).

<Original mode control processing>
Next, the original mode control process (step S325) in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the original mode control process.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the original mode setting flag stored in the RAM 408 is OFF. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S902. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not a regular password has been input by the player. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S903, and if not, the process ends. Here, the input of the password itself may be regulated for a predetermined period based on the input of the illegal password a plurality of times. (For example, based on the fact that an illegal password has been input three times in succession, the input of a new password is restricted until the special figure fluctuates ten times.) In step 903, personal setting reflection processing is performed. In this personal setting reflection process, personal data such as original mode setting information, mission achievement flag (mission achievement status), original mode point and the like are stored in the RAM 408 in association with the input password (identification information). For example, the personal data is acquired and copied to a predetermined variable. In the next step S904, after the above-described original mode setting flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S905. In this example, an example of inputting a password is shown. However, the player may be able to input personal data such as original mode setting information, mission achievement flag (mission achievement status), original mode points, and the like. In addition, the decryption logic is stored in advance in the game machine, and personal data such as original mode setting information, mission achievement flag (mission achievement status), and original mode point included in the input password is read out, It may be configured to copy to a variable.

  In step S905, it is determined whether the above-described mission achievement flag is ON or OFF. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S906, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S909. In step S906, mission achievement information update processing is performed. In this mission achievement information update processing, when the mission achievement is the setting condition (appearance condition) of the original mode setting information in the above-mentioned original mode specification table, the original mode setting information corresponding to the accomplished mission is set. For example, the mission No. is set during the original mode setting. When 6 is achieved, the original mode setting information 2 is set. In step S907, the above-described mission achievement flag is set to OFF. In the next step S908, the mission achievement notification flag stored in the RAM 408 is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S909, it is determined whether the above-described mission achievement notification flag is ON or OFF. If ON, the process proceeds to step S910, and if OFF, the process proceeds to step S913. In step S910, it is determined whether or not it is a mission achievement notification execution opportunity. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S911, and if not, the process proceeds to step S913. In step S911, a setting for performing a mission achievement notification effect for suggesting to the player that the mission has been achieved is performed. move on.

  In step S913, it is determined whether or not there is a request for changing the original mode specification. If there is a request for changing the original mode specification, the process proceeds to step S914 to perform the original mode specification change process, and then proceeds to step S915 to change the original mode specification. If there is no request, the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S915, it is determined whether or not there is a request for confirmation of the original mode setting information. If there is a request for confirmation of the original mode setting information, the process proceeds to step S916 to perform the original mode setting information notification process and then proceeds to step S917. If there is no mode setting information confirmation request, the process advances to step S917.

  In step S917, it is determined whether or not the original mode end condition is satisfied. If the original mode end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S918. If not, the process ends. In step S918, an original mode reflected image generation process is performed. In the next step S919, the image generated in step S918 is set to display, and in step S920, the personal data copied to the variable in step S903 is cleared (initialized), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S1009, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S1007, a process such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, an effect data update process is performed.

  In step S <b> 1011, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S1013, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S1003.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1201 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1003 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Accordingly, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1203, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Menu screen>
Next, the menu screen of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 47 and FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of menu screen transition, and FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of identification information.

  The operation unit 136 according to the present embodiment includes six buttons, that is, an upper button 136a, a lower button 136b, a left button 136c, a right button 136d, an OK button 136e, and a clear button 136f. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects a pressing operation of any button of the operation unit 136 during a game or display of a demonstration screen, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the same figure (a-1 ) Is displayed in the initial state. In this example, menus for member registration, password input, QR code (registered trademark) issuance, data clear, and end are displayed on the menu screen.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the member registration menu is highlighted as shown in FIG. -1) is switched to the display of (a-2) in the figure to display a QR code (registered trademark) (for example, see FIG. 48), and the mobile site by reading the QR code (registered trademark) with a mobile phone A display for instructing the player to obtain a password from (a management server 1200 described later) is performed. Further, after the elapse of a predetermined time, the display is switched to the display of FIG.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the password input menu is highlighted as shown in FIG. The display of (b-1) is switched to the display of (b-2) in the figure, and a display prompting the input of the password acquired by the member registration is performed. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains a password (see, for example, FIG. 48) input by the player in the same figure (b-2), and a plurality of passwords in which the obtained passwords are stored in the RAM 408. It is determined whether it matches any of the above (whether it is a regular password). If the passwords do not match, a display indicating that the password could not be recognized (in this example, “password cannot be recognized”) was displayed as shown in FIG. Later, the menu screen is deleted (in this example, the screen is returned to the demo screen). On the other hand, if the passwords match, a display indicating that the password was recognized (in this example, “password recognition succeeded”) was displayed as shown in FIG. Later, the menu screen is deleted (in this example, the screen is returned to the demo screen).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the QR code (registered trademark) issuance menu is highlighted as shown in FIG. Whether to display the QR code (registered trademark) by switching the display of FIG. 10C-1 to the display of FIG. 8C-2 (game information stored in the pachinko machine 100 or personal Confirm whether or not to read data). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 2C-2, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the item “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” is highlighted. If it is detected, the display in FIG. 2C-2 is switched to the display in FIG. 3C-3, and a QR code (registered trademark) including game information and personal data is displayed, and a QR code ( (Registered trademark) is read with a mobile phone, and a display instructing to record game information and personal data on a mobile site is performed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 waits for the elapse of a predetermined time to switch to the display of (c-4) in the figure, and then the OK button 136e when the “End” item is highlighted. When the pressing operation of the OK button 136e is detected when the “return” item is highlighted, the menu screen is deleted (in this example, the screen is returned to the demo screen). Then, the display shown in FIG. In this example, the QR code (registered trademark) is issued after calling the menu screen. However, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the big hit game, after the occurrence of an error, A QR code (registered trademark) may be issued (without calling a menu screen) after the mission is achieved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5D-1, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the data clear menu is highlighted, and the password is input. If it is completed, whether or not to delete the game information and personal data stored in the pachinko machine 100 by switching the display of FIG. (D-1) to the display of (d-2) of FIG. Confirmation display is performed. On the other hand, as shown in (d-1) in the figure, when the pressing operation of the OK button 136e is detected while the data clear menu is highlighted, and the password input is not completed, After switching the display of (d-1) to the display of (d-3) and displaying that the password has not been entered, the menu screen is deleted (in this example, the demo screen is displayed). Return). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4D-2, the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the OK button 136e is pressed when the “DATA CLEAR” item is highlighted. (D-2) is switched to the display shown in (d-4) to notify that game information and personal data have been deleted, and then the menu screen is deleted (in this example, the demo screen is displayed). Return).

  Further, as shown in (e-1), the first sub-control unit 400 displays the menu screen when the pressing operation of the OK button 136e is detected when the end menu is highlighted. Erase (in this example, return to the demo screen).

<Power interruption / recovery processing 1>
Next, the power interruption / recovery processing 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the electric power interruption / recovery process 1. FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which a normal game is being played, but no special figure 1 variable game is being played, and there is no special figure 1 variable game on hold. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of any button of the operation unit 136 in such a state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the menu screen as shown in FIG. . For convenience of explanation, only the first special figure display device 212 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 are shown in FIG. 9A, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the password input menu is highlighted, as shown in FIG. The display of b) is switched to the display of FIG. Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the password input in FIG. 5C and determines whether or not the acquired password matches any of the plurality of passwords stored in the RAM 408. If the passwords match, a display indicating that the password could be recognized (in this example, a display indicating “password recognition succeeded”) is performed as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 acquires one or more original mode setting information corresponding to the identification information input by the player in step S701 of the above-described effect control process. In this example, As the original mode setting information corresponding to the password input in FIG. 3C, three pieces of information 1, 2, and 3 are acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S703 of the above-described effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the original mode setting information, the result of the special figure variation game, or the like. To decide. In this example, the original mode setting information is 1 to 3, and the success / failure result of the special figure variation game is selected based on the information on the loss of eyelids, eye patch wearing, and sword wearing, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the character image before custom (image of Yoshimune) shown in FIG. 6A is displayed with an image with a heel, eye patch, and sword attached, and an original mode point (in this example, 121 ( Point)) is displayed. In this example, an example of character appearance custom in the original mode specification table shown in FIG. 42 is shown, but other customs such as mode custom and lamp lighting pattern custom may be used together, or character appearance custom may be used. Other customs may be performed instead of custom.

  When the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped due to a lightning strike or power failure during a period in which such a custom effect is being executed, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs an on-state low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, The controller 300 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S239 of the main controller timer interrupt process described above, and then performs a power-off process in step S243. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S505 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process described above, and then interrupts in step S507. Process. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 erases personal data such as the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, and the original mode setting flag value. When the power supply is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes in a state where no display is possible as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is started and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs the low voltage signal in the off state to the basic circuit 302, the main control unit 300 in step S105 of the main control unit main process described above. After determining that the low-voltage signal is off (no power-off is detected), after performing initial settings in step S107, it is determined in step S109 that the state returns to the state before power-off (before power-off). Then, the power recovery process in step S111 is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an initialization process in step S301 of the first sub-control unit main process described above. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In the subsequent effect control process, as shown in FIG. 6G, information indicating that the power recovery process is being performed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, “please wait for a while”). Is displayed).

  Subsequently, as described above, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, and the like in step S703 of the effect control process. However, in this example, since personal data is erased at the time of power interruption, it is not possible to perform an effect based on the personal data. For this reason, the personal data (for example, the original mode setting information 0, the mission achievement flag, etc.) of the initial value as shown in FIG. OFF, based on the original mode setting flag OFF), the character image (Yoshimune image) is displayed with an initial character image (character image without any custom) in which no eyelids, eyepatch, or sword are attached. Based on the lottery result (losing) of the special value variable game of the initial value, the combination of the decoration symbols in the initial state (in this example, decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 7) is displayed.

According to the power interruption / recovery processing 1, the information input by the player before the power interruption and the information generated based on the information are initialized (discarded) at the time of the power interruption. Since the previous production mode (Fig. (E)) and the production mode after power recovery (Fig. (H)) can be made different, the amusement shop side will know that an electrical system abnormality has occurred on the spot. It is easy to create an opportunity. Also, even when the player has been looking away for a long time, or when a power interruption occurs during a long absence, it is easy to notice that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical system. In particular, power interruptions in special productions that are subject to certain restrictions (for example, special productions that require a password to be registered by member registration and the password must be entered, special productions that are customized by personal data, etc.) -If applied to the power recovery process, the special production mode before power interruption can be changed to the production mode in the initial state, so that it is easy to notice that an abnormality in the electrical system has occurred.
In addition, if it is possible to save personal data such as the identification information, the original mode setting information, the result of the special figure, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, etc. If an abnormality occurs in the information, a display different from that before the power interruption may be performed in the power recovery process. In such a case, since the display in which the player arbitrarily selects the display mode is switched, the player feels a strong distrust with the abnormality, and there is a risk that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

<Power interruption / recovery processing 2>
Next, the power interruption / recovery processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the electric power interruption / recovery process 2. FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 5C is a probability change state after the big hit game is finished, and is a state where a special figure 1 variable game is being performed (during special figure fluctuation). Further, the number of times (01) in this example (c) shows the number of special figure 1 variable games in the probability variation state. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of any button of the operation unit 136 in such a state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the menu screen as shown in FIG. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the password input menu is highlighted, as shown in FIG. The display of d) is switched to the display of FIG. Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the password input in FIG. 5E and determines whether or not the acquired password matches any of a plurality of passwords stored in the RAM 408. If the passwords match, a display indicating that the password has been recognized (in this example, a display indicating “password recognition succeeded”) is performed as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub control unit 400 acquires one or more original mode setting information corresponding to the identification information input by the player in step S701 of the above-described effect control process. In this example, As the original mode setting information corresponding to the password input in FIG.

  Subsequently, in step S703 of the above-described effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the original mode setting information, the result of the special figure variation game, or the like. To decide. In this example, the original mode setting information is 2 to 4, and the result of the special figure variation game is based on the information on the loss of eyeglasses and sword wearing, as shown in FIG. The character image before the custom shown in FIG. 6C (image of Yoshimune) is displayed with an eye patch and a sword attached, and the character image is changed from the image of Yoshimune with a low appearance rate by changing the pattern of the eyelids. It has been changed to the image of Ekichi sect.

  When the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped due to a lightning strike or power failure during a period in which such a custom effect is being executed, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs an on-state low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, The controller 300 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S239 of the main controller timer interrupt process described above, and then performs a power-off process in step S243. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S505 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process described above, and then interrupts in step S507. Process. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 erases personal data such as the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, and the original mode setting flag value. When the power supply is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state where no display is possible as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is started and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs the low voltage signal in the off state to the basic circuit 302, the main control unit 300 in step S105 of the main control unit main process described above. After determining that the low-voltage signal is off (no power-off is detected), after performing initial settings in step S107, it is determined in step S109 that the state returns to the state before power-off (before power-off). Then, the power recovery process in step S111 is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an initialization process in step S301 of the first sub-control unit main process described above. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In the subsequent effect control process, information indicating that the power recovery process is being performed is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as described above, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, and the like in step S703 of the effect control process. However, in this example, since personal data is erased at the time of power interruption, it is not possible to perform an effect based on the personal data. For this reason, the character image (Yoshimune's image) is created based on the initial personal data as shown in FIG. 6 (j) without returning to the production mode immediately before the power interruption as shown in FIG. In addition to displaying the initial character image (character image that is not custom made) with no eyepatch or sword attached, and a spear pattern not changing, the lottery result of the initial value special figure variation game ( Based on the “losing”, the combination of the decoration patterns in the initial state (in this example, decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 7) is displayed.

  In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 erases (clears) the number of special figure 1 variable games in the probability variation state at the time of power interruption, “xx times” until the information is acquired from the main control unit 300. Is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect mode based on the information on the gaming state acquired from the main control unit 300 (in this example, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability), and the character image runs. indicate.

  According to the power interruption / recovery processing 2, the information input by the player before the power interruption and the information generated based on the information are initialized (discarded) at the time of the power interruption. Since it is possible to differentiate between the previous presentation mode (Fig. (G)) and the post-recovery mode (Fig. (J)), the amusement shop will recognize on the spot that an electrical system abnormality has occurred. It is easy to create an opportunity.

  In the power interruption / recovery processing 2, in particular, the display of the character image “Evil Buddhism” (FIG. (G)) having a high degree of difficulty for customization by the player also attracts attention from other players. Since the character image in the initial state is displayed by the power interruption process in the collecting state, not only the player playing the game table but also other players can easily notice the occurrence of the power interruption. It is easy to create an opportunity for the amusement shop to grasp on the spot that a system abnormality has occurred.

<Power interruption / recovery processing 3>
Next, the power interruption / recovery processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the power interruption / recovery process 3.

  The state shown in FIG. 5A is a state in the original mode (original mode setting information is 1 to 3). When the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of any button of the operation unit 136 in such a state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the menu screen as shown in FIG. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 detects a pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the QR code (registered trademark) issuance menu is highlighted. Whether to switch the display of FIG. 5B to the display of FIG. 4C and display the QR code (registered trademark) (whether to read game information or personal data stored in the pachinko machine 100) ) Is displayed. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the OK button 136e when the item “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” is highlighted as shown in FIG. In this case, the display shown in FIG. 4C is switched to the display shown in FIG. 4D to display the QR code (registered trademark), and the QR code (registered trademark) is read by the mobile phone and the game information is displayed on the mobile site. And display to instruct to record personal data.

  When such a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped due to a lightning strike or power failure, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, The controller 300 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S239 of the main controller timer interrupt process described above, and then performs a power-off process in step S243. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the low voltage signal is on (detected power-off) in step S505 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process described above, and then interrupts in step S507. Process. In this power-off process, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and the input / output port is initialized. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 erases personal data such as the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, and the original mode setting flag value. When the power supply is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state where no display is possible as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is started and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs the low voltage signal in the off state to the basic circuit 302, the main control unit 300 in step S105 of the main control unit main process described above. After determining that the low-voltage signal is off (no power-off is detected), after performing initial settings in step S107, it is determined in step S109 that the state returns to the state before power-off (before power-off). Then, the power recovery process in step S111 is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an initialization process in step S301 of the first sub-control unit main process described above. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. Further, in the subsequent effect control process, information indicating that the power recovery process is being performed is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, as described above, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the identification information, the original mode setting information, the special result determination result, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, and the like in step S703 of the effect control process. However, in this example, since personal data is erased at the time of power interruption, it is not possible to perform an effect based on the personal data. For this reason, the character image (Yoshimune image) is displayed on the basis of the initial personal data as shown in (g) without returning to the production mode immediately before the power interruption as shown in (d). In addition to displaying an initial character image (a character image that has not been customized at all) with no eyelids, eyepatch, or sword attached, the initial state is based on the lottery result (losing) of the special value variable game. The combination of the decorative symbols (in this example, the decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 7) is displayed.

  According to the power interruption / recovery processing 3, a QR code (registered trademark) display including identification information, original mode setting information, special result determination result, mission achievement flag value, original mode setting flag value, etc. Will be forcibly terminated by the power interruption process, causing the player who has not yet been able to read the QR code (registered trademark) to feel a strong resentment, and that there was an abnormality in the gaming table By informing the store clerk, it is easy for the amusement store side to have an opportunity to grasp on the spot that an electric system abnormality has occurred as a result. In particular, a game is played in a password input state, there is an increase in mission achievements and original mode points, and the QR code (registered trademark) issued in this state is very important for the player, so a strong resentment Easy to feel.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine 1100 to which the present invention is applied will be described. 52 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100. FIG. Further, hereinafter, a configuration different from the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described in order to omit redundant description.

  The slot machine 1100 includes a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1101. Three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, and right reel 1112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 1101 and rotated inside the slot machine 1100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1110 to 1112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1110 to 1112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1110 to 1112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1120 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 1123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, every time the bet button 1130 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 1132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be performed electronically by using the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1141, and the insertion includes both. is there. The stored number display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 1125, the game information display 1126, and the payout number display 1127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or when the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. Stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1135, and are associated with the reels 1110 to 1112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1137 to 1139, and when the stop button 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1133 is a button for pressing and removing a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1134 is a button for adjusting the medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1155. Door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1102 of slot machine 1100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 1136, a title panel 1162 for displaying a model name and pasting various types of certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 1162, a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161 are provided.

  The sound hole 1180 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 1182 provided inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1160 is disposed above the front door 1102, and a sound hole 1143 is provided above the effect device 1160.

  This effect device 1160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1163 including two right shutters 1163a and 1163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 1100 when the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157. It has become.

<Power interruption / recovery processing 4>
Next, the power interruption / recovery processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of performing the power interruption / recovery process 4.

  The state shown in FIG. 5A is a state during the original mode (original mode setting information is set to 1 to 3). When the slot machine 1100 prompts the stop operation of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 in such a state, the slot machine 1100 displays an image corresponding to the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 for prompting the stop operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and stops. Sound corresponding to stop buttons 1137 to 1139 for prompting operation is output from the speaker 1182 to perform operation navigation.

  For example, in FIG. 7B, when operating the stop button 1138 corresponding to the middle reel 1111 while rotating the three reels 1110 to 1112, an image corresponding to the stop button 1138 that prompts the stop operation (this In the example, an image including the characters “Nakaja” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and a sound corresponding to the stop button 1138 that prompts a stop operation (in this example, a sound “Nakaja”) is generated. The sound is output from the speaker 1182.

  In FIG. 8C, when operating the stop button 1139 corresponding to the right reel 1112 while the two reels 1110 and 1112 are rotating, an image corresponding to the stop button 1139 that prompts the stop operation (this In the example, an image including the characters “right” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and a sound corresponding to the stop button 1139 that prompts a stop operation (in this example, a sound “right”)). The sound is output from the speaker 1182.

  If the power supply of the slot machine 1100 is stopped during such operation navigation due to lightning or power failure, the slot machine 1100 displays a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power interruption state when the power is restored. The return data is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM, and personal data such as the identification information, the original mode setting information, the internal lottery result, the mission achievement flag value, and the original mode setting flag value are erased. When the power supply is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1157 cannot display any information as shown in FIG. 4D, and the reels 1110 to 1112 cannot rotate.

  Subsequently, when power supply to the slot machine 1100 is started, the slot machine 1100 reads the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM at the time of power interruption, and resets the stack pointer. (This setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM at the time of power interruption is read, and after resetting to each register, interrupt permission is set.

  Subsequently, the slot machine 1100 uses the liquid crystal display device 1157 based on the identification information, the original mode setting information, the internal lottery result, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, and the like. However, in this example, since the personal data is erased when the power is interrupted, it is not possible to produce an effect based on the personal data. For this reason, the character image (Yoshimune image) is displayed on the basis of the initial personal data as shown in FIG. 5E without returning to the production mode immediately before the power interruption as shown in FIG. In addition to displaying an initial character image (a character image that has not been customized at all) with no eyelid, eye patch, or sword attached, operation navigation by the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the speaker 1182 is not performed. On the other hand, the reels 1110 to 1112 are returned to the stop mode immediately before the power interruption as shown in FIG.

  According to the power interruption / recovery process 4, the information input by the player before the power interruption and the information generated based on the information are initialized (discarded) at the time of power interruption. Since it is possible to differentiate between the previous performance mode (Fig. (A)) and the post-recovery mode (Fig. (E)), the amusement shop will recognize on the spot that an electrical system abnormality has occurred. It is easy to create an opportunity.

<Power interruption / recovery processing 5>
Next, the power interruption / recovery processing 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect table. FIG. 54A shows an effect table referred to when there is no personal data, and FIG. 54B shows an effect table referred when there is personal data. It is. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a change in the effect mode when the power interruption / recovery process 5 is executed.

  The effect table shown in FIG. 54 is a table in which the lottery result of the internal lottery by the slot machine 1100, the random number for effect selection, and the effect mode are stored in association with each other. For example, if there is no personal data (such as the above-described identification information, original mode setting information, internal lottery result, mission achievement flag value, original mode setting flag value, etc.), the slot machine 1100 (FIG. ), When the lottery result is lost, “no effect” is selected with a probability of 80% and “voice (female)“ first ”is output at the first stop” with a probability of 20% (see above) When the first stop operation is performed, “output“ first ”of female voice from speaker 1182)” is selected.

  In addition, when there is personal data, the slot machine 1100 refers to the effect table in FIG. 5B, and when the lottery result is replay, selects “no effect” with a probability of 40%, and 60% “Sound (Male)“ Oo ”is output at the time of the first stop” (“Oo” of male voice is output from the speaker 1182 when the above-described first stop operation is performed) is selected with probability.

  In addition, when the lottery result is a bonus and there is personal data, the slot machine 1100 refers to the effect table in FIG. 5B, with a probability of 15% “voice (male) at first stop” ”(When the first stop operation described above is performed, the male voice“ O ”is output from the speaker 1182)” is selected with a probability of 30% “voice (male)“ "Ban" is output (when the second stop operation described above is performed, the male voice "Ban" is output from the speaker 1182) ", with a 50% probability of" voice (male) at the third stop " “Bulma jar” is output (when the above-described third stop operation is performed, “Blu My jar” of male voice is output from the speaker 1182) ”. Therefore, when the lottery result is a bonus and there is custom performance information, “Oh” is displayed according to three stop operations of the reels 1110 to 1112 (first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation). "→" Ban "→" Bulmaiger ", that is, a word with a single meaning of" big behaviour "may be output, which creates an effect that gradually raises the player's expectation Is possible.

  The state shown in FIG. 5A is a state during the original mode (original mode setting information is set to 1 to 3). When the slot machine 1100 prompts the stop operation of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 in such a state, the slot machine 1100 refers to the effect table (with personal data) shown in FIG. The presentation mode is determined based on the image, the image corresponding to the presentation mode is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and the sound corresponding to the presentation mode is output from the speaker 1182 so as to perform the expectation feeling presentation. It is composed.

  For example, in the same figure (b), during the rotation of the three reels 1110 to 1112, based on the lottery result (bonus) of the internal lottery, an image indicating the internal winning of the bonus (in this example, “big behavior” “Large” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and a sound suggesting the internal winning of the bonus (in this example, a sound of “chance”) is output from the speaker 1182. In FIG. 8C, the male voice “O” is output from the speaker 1182 based on the stop operation (first stop operation) of the stop button 1137 corresponding to the left reel 1110 and the lottery result (bonus). doing. Also, in FIG. 6D, the male voice “bang” is output from the speaker 1182 based on the stop operation (second stop operation) of the stop button 1138 corresponding to the middle reel 1111 and the lottery result (bonus). doing.

  If the power supply of the slot machine 1100 is stopped due to a lightning strike or a power failure during such an expectation effect, the slot machine 1100 returns a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power interruption state upon power recovery. Is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM, and personal data such as the above-described identification information, original mode setting information, lottery result of internal lottery, mission achievement flag value, original mode setting flag value and the like are erased. When the power supply is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1157 is in a state in which no display can be performed as shown in FIG. 5E, and the reels 1110 to 1112 cannot be rotated.

  Subsequently, when power supply to the slot machine 1100 is started, the slot machine 1100 reads the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM at the time of power interruption, and resets the stack pointer. (This setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM at the time of power interruption is read, and after resetting to each register, interrupt permission is set.

  Subsequently, the slot machine 1100 uses the liquid crystal display device 1157 based on the identification information, the original mode setting information, the internal lottery result, the mission achievement flag value, the original mode setting flag value, and the like. However, in this example, since the personal data is erased at the time of power interruption, the effect mode is determined using the effect table (no personal data) shown in FIG. 54 (a).

  Specifically, since the lottery result of the internal lottery is a bonus, “sound (female)“ Sun ”is output at the time of the third stop” is selected with a probability of 50% as an effect mode. For this reason, the character image (princess image) corresponding to the lottery result (bonus) of the internal lottery as shown in FIG. 5 (f) without returning to the production mode immediately before the power interruption as shown in FIG. ) And the initial value personal data, the stop operation of the stop button 1139 corresponding to the right reel 1112 (third stop operation), and the lottery result (bonus) as shown in FIG. The female voice “Sun” is output from the speaker 1182.

  According to the power interruption / recovery processing 5, the information input by the player before the power interruption and the information generated based on the information are initialized (discarded) at the time of the power interruption. Because it is possible to make different the appearance mode (Figs. (A) to (d)) before the power recovery and the mode of appearance after power recovery (Fig. (G)), the amusement shop side It is easy to create an opportunity to grasp on the spot.

<Game system>
Next, a gaming system using the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine 1100 described above will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system. This gaming system includes a management server 1200, a plurality of gaming tables (pachinko machines 100 and slot machines 1100) installed in a gaming store, and a mobile phone 1250 owned by the player. . The management server 1200, the plurality of game machines 100, 1100, and the mobile phone 1250 can communicate with each other via wired or wireless communication.

  The management server 1200 is a terminal for controlling the entire gaming system, and a server machine or a personal computer can be applied. The storage means (for example, HDD, DVD, etc.) of the management server 1200 is associated with identification information (in this example, QR code (registered trademark)), and has the above-mentioned personal data, membership number, password, name, etc. It is remembered.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the flow of server control processing executed by the management server 1200. In step S1501, the management server 1200 determines whether or not there is an access to a predetermined URL. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1503. Here, in addition to the URL information of the home page provided by the management server 1200, the predetermined URL includes information obtained by encrypting the above-described personal data, membership number, password, and the like. The management server 1200 includes the predetermined URL. Personal data can be obtained by accessing The player selects the QR code (registered trademark) issued menu on the above menu screen, thereby encrypting the above personal data, membership number, password, etc. in addition to the URL information of the home page provided by the management server 1200. It is possible to obtain a QR code (registered trademark) including the information. Note that the management server 1200 may be configured to input personal data such as a membership number and a password via a provided homepage and acquire the personal data based on the input membership number.

  In step S1502, the personal data is acquired based on the accessed URL, the acquired personal data is stored in the storage means, and the personal data is updated.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether there is a customization request. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1504 to update the personal data based on the operation. If not, the process proceeds to step S1505. The updated personal data may be transmitted and stored in the gaming tables 100 and 1100 via the network, or may be transmitted and stored in the gaming tables 100 and 1100 via the player's mobile phone. .

  In step S1505, it is determined whether there is a password issuance request. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1506, and a password is generated / issued based on the personal data. If not, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, after other processing is performed, the processing ends. Other processing is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, processing of browsing personal data, downloading a standby image or ringtone (registered trademark), and the like. In addition, by acquiring the administrator authority of the management server 1200, a process for rewriting specific personal data (for example, lottery is performed based on a member number, and personal data corresponding to the member number won in the lottery is converted into advantageous information. Rewriting process) may be included.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine 1100) according to the present embodiment has at least one of a plurality of effects, and an effect means that can execute at least one of the effects, and the player sets a password. And at least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, a custom effect shown in FIG. 49 (e)), and The production means can execute at least the first production in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49 (e)), and the first production is executed in the first period. Is the first probability, and the probability that the first effect is executed in the second period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 49F to 49H) is the second probability. , The first probability is The first period is a period after the password is input to the input means, and the second period is the input of the password to the input means. It is a game stand characterized by being a period not being played.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the execution probability of the effect between a period after the password is input by the player and a period when the password is not. For this reason, it is possible to give a strong sense of incongruity to the player based on the execution state of the production, to facilitate the call of the store clerk of the amusement store based on the sense of incongruity, and to indicate that an abnormality in the electrical system has occurred In some cases, it is possible to provide a game stand that is easy for the side to have an opportunity to grasp on the spot.
Further, the effect means may be capable of at least starting to execute the first effect in the first period.

  The second period is a period after the occurrence of power interruption in the first period, and the second period is a period before the password is input to the input means. Also good.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (h)), and the effect means includes the second effect in the second period. The probability that the second effect is executed in the first period is a third probability, and the second effect is executed in the second period. The probability may be a fourth probability, and the third probability may be a probability that is at least different from the fourth probability.

  The first probability may be at least higher than the second probability. The second probability may be zero. The third probability may be zero.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100, the slot machine 1100) according to the present invention includes effect notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a liquid crystal display device 1157) for performing notification including an effect display for effecting a game. The individual information input means (for example, the operation unit 136, the original mode control process in step S325) capable of inputting individual information (for example, personal data (password)) and the individual information input by the individual information input means Individual information storage means (for example, RAM 408) to be stored, and effect control means (for example, step) for performing control for causing the effect notification means to execute a predetermined effect according to the individual information stored in the individual information storage means The effect control process of S309) and a predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) are input, and the predetermined activation signal is An electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the game control means (for example, the first sub-control unit main process) for starting the game control based on the force and the electric system for operating the game control means An electrical system abnormality signal output means (for example, a voltage monitoring circuit) that outputs (for example, a low voltage signal), and information related to game control when the electrical system abnormality signal is output (for example, lottery of special figure variable games) As a result, a game control information storage means (for example, a power interruption process in step S507) for storing an internal lottery result) and the predetermined activation signal (for example, a reset signal) after the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Based on the input to the game control means, the game control information stored in the game control information storage means is changed to the control state when the electric system abnormality signal is output. And a control state return means (for example, initial setting in step S301) for returning based on the information, wherein the effect control means is the individual information stored in the individual information storage means. Based on the above, the effect notification means is used to perform control for executing the effect according to the first aspect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 49A), and the control state return means is according to the first aspect. The electric system abnormality signal is output when the electric system abnormality signal is output in a state where the effect is being executed by the effect notification means, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. The effect according to the first aspect, which has been executed by the effect notification means, is switched to the effect according to the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 49 (h)) and executed. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the aspect of the effect executed based on the individual information input by the player himself is changed by power interruption / recovery, it is possible to give a strong sense of discomfort to the player. , It may be possible to promote the call of the store clerk based on the uncomfortable feeling.

  The individual information includes individual setting information (for example, original mode setting information) indicating an element set by the player from a plurality of elements (for example, custom contents), and the effect control means includes a plurality of effects. Select a specific effect (for example, an effect shown in the item “Custom Contents” in FIG. 42) associated in advance with the individual setting information included in the individual information stored in the individual information storage means. Then, the specific effect may be executed as the effect according to the first aspect.

  With such a configuration, the first mode can be selected by the player, so that when the mode changes due to power interruption / power recovery, a stronger sense of incongruity can be given, Since the mode that should have been selected is not executed, it may be possible to promote the call of the store clerk by making the player feel suspicious or angry, and may receive an explanation of the current game state from the store clerk. . In addition, since the first mode can be selected by the player, when the mode changes due to power interruption / power recovery, it can give a stronger sense of incongruity, and the mode that should have been selected By not being executed, by making the player feel suspicious or angry, the call of the store clerk can be promoted, and the store clerk may be able to receive an explanation of the current gaming state.

  In addition, when the individual information is stored in the individual information storage unit, the effect control unit determines whether or not to perform the effect by lottery, and the effect according to the first mode is the first. And the second aspect may be performed with a second probability higher than the first probability.

  With this configuration, after a power outage occurs during the execution of a rare performance with a low execution probability, a common performance with a high execution probability is notified, so that a sense of superiority or a sense of accomplishment is achieved due to the appearance of a rare performance. The suspicious feeling and anger of the player who has obtained the game can be raised, the call of the store clerk can be promoted, and the store clerk can receive an explanation of the current gaming state.

  The effect according to the second aspect is an effect (initial effect) performed when the individual information is not stored in the individual information storage means (for example, when personal data is deleted). Also good.

  With such a configuration, an effect that is executed based on the input of individual information that was executed before the power recovery is not performed after the power recovery, so that a strong sense of discomfort can be given to the player. In addition, this may cause the player to feel as if the game table intentionally stopped reporting information, thereby promoting the suspicious feeling of the player and promoting the call of the store clerk in some cases.

  In addition, when the individual information is stored in the individual information storage means, the individual information update for updating the individual information (for example, mission flag) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied as the game progresses Means (for example, mission achievement determination processing), and the effect control means may change the effect according to the first mode based on the individual information constantly updated by the individual information update means (for example, (Equipped with eye patch on the character image when mission No. 6 is achieved).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the fun of the game stand by showing the player that the performance executed based on the input of the individual information changes in the aspect as the game progresses. However, the player can always recognize that the individual information has been input, and in the event of a power interruption or power recovery, it is more uncomfortable by not performing the performance that was always performed. You may be able to give In particular, if the production time of the production executed based on the input of the individual information is set to be longer than the production time of the other production, the sense of incongruity can be further increased, and the electric system abnormality It is easy to create an opportunity for the amusement store to grasp on the spot that this has occurred.

  Further, code information for generating code information (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) based on the individual information stored in the individual information storage means based on a predetermined operation by the player. The production control means is configured to notify the code information using the effect notification means based on the fact that the code information generation means has generated the code information, and during execution of the notification, When the electrical system abnormality signal is output and then the start signal is input, the notification of the code information that has been performed using the effect notification unit until the electrical system abnormality signal is output is performed. The means need not be notified (for example, see FIG. 51).

  With such a configuration, the code information displayed by the player on his / her own will be hidden due to power interruption / recovery, but the code information includes the input from individual information to the display of the code information. Since information indicating the progress of the game is included, even though it is information that proves that the player has played the game, by switching the code information to non-display by power interruption / power recovery, In some cases, the player may be angry and suspicious.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in the above embodiment. For example, by making the sound output from the speaker before power interruption different from the sound output from the speaker after power recovery, You may make it easy to give the game store the opportunity to grasp on the spot that abnormality of the electric system has occurred. Further, the lighting pattern of the lamp before power interruption and the lighting pattern of the lamp after power recovery may be different, or the movement of the accessory before power interruption and the movement of the accessory after power recovery may be different. That is, the “production notification means” according to the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 (1 type), it can be applied to a pachinko machine (2 types, 3 types), a sealed pachinko machine, a pachinko machine, etc., an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, It can also be applied to smart balls and the like. Further, for example, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine.

  FIG. 58 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 58, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching unit 1001 to the game area 1002 is discharged from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching unit 1001 again. In addition, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. 1 and the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 33 are not provided.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 58 encloses a sphere, circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

In the above description,
“A game table provided with effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, and various lamps 418) capable of performing a plurality of effects.
First storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 including the first storage area M1) capable of storing at least first information (for example, first release information shown in FIG. 11 and the like) and ,
A first information updating unit (for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least updating the first information stored in the first storage unit;
Input means (for example, operation key unit 190) capable of inputting conversion information (for example, password, two-dimensional code, etc.);
Acquisition means (for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400) capable of acquiring at least second information (for example, second release information shown in FIG. 12 and the like) from the input conversion information;
Second storage means capable of storing at least the second information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 including the second storage area M2);
A second information update unit (for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least updating the second information stored in the second storage unit;
Corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information, the plurality of types of effects (for example, “Song A”, “Song B”, “Song C for music”) ..., In the case of a character image, designation means (for example, first sub-subtitle) that can designate one or more types of effects among “character A”, “character B”, “character C”. CPU 404 of control unit 400)
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one or more kinds of effects designated by the designation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In a conventional gaming machine, what is performed based on one stored information (memory information for determining an executable effect) is determined in order to determine an executable effect among a plurality of types of effects. Are known. In such a gaming machine, when a player inputs a password and logs in, advantageous storage information that increases the types of effects that can be executed is stored. When moving to another pachinko machine, advantageous memory information remains in the pachinko machine that has been playing until now. Then, after that, other players who try to play with the pachinko machine may have fewer executable performances with their own passwords. In such a situation, other players Does not bother to enter his password and play. Therefore, the pachinko machine that attempts to increase the types of effects that can be executed by performing many games is impaired, and the interest of the game may be reduced. This becomes conspicuous when a so-called crab walk is performed in which the player repeats the table movement while logging in.

  On the other hand, if the memorized memorized information is cleared, the types of effects that can be executed are in the initial state, and can be executed according to the game history accumulated in the pachinko machine. If there is a function to increase the number of types of productions, there are few types of productions that can be performed by a player who does not log in, and this results in a decrease in game motivation. There is a case to be.

  According to the present invention, by providing at least a plurality of storage areas, it may be possible to solve the above-described problems of conventional gaming machines and prevent a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only one effect among a plurality of types of effects, or may necessarily execute one effect among a plurality of types of effects. .

  Further, the first storage unit may be a unit that stores only the first information, or a unit that always stores the first information. Moreover, the means which can memorize | store also about one or several information other than 1st information may be sufficient.

  Further, the first information updating unit may be a unit that can update only the first information stored in the first storage unit, or the first information stored in the first storage unit. It may be a means for surely updating. In addition, information other than the first information stored in the first storage means may be a means that can be updated.

  Further, the input unit may be a unit that can input only conversion information, or may be a unit that can input information other than the conversion information.

  Further, the acquisition unit may be a unit that can acquire only the second information from the input conversion information, or may be a unit that always acquires the second information from the input conversion information. Further, the acquisition unit may be a unit that can acquire information other than the second information from the input conversion information.

  Further, the second storage unit may be a unit that stores only the second information, or a unit that always stores the second information. Further, it may be a means capable of storing one or more pieces of information other than the second information.

  The second information updating unit may be a unit that can update only the second information stored in the second storage unit, or the second information stored in the second storage unit. It may be a means for surely updating. Further, information other than the second information stored in the second storage means may be updateable.

  Further, the designation means may be a means capable of designating one or a plurality of types of effects among a plurality of types of effects corresponding to only one of the first information and the second information. Then, in correspondence with both the first information and the second information, a means capable of designating one or a plurality of types of effects among a plurality of types of effects may be used. The designation means is a means capable of designating only one or a plurality of types of effects among a plurality of types of effects corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information. Alternatively, it may be a means that always designates one or a plurality of types of effects among a plurality of types of effects corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information.

  The effect means may be a means capable of executing only one or more types of effects designated by the designation means, or means for surely executing one or more types of effects designated by the designation means. May be. The effect means may be a means capable of executing an effect other than one or a plurality of types of effects specified by the specifying means.

Also, “at least one or more types of effects designated by the designation means are notified (for example, the song list ML shown in FIG. 12C includes“ Song A ”,“ Song B ”, and“ Song C ”). Is provided with a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, the player may be able to recognize which of the effects can be selected.

  Here, the notification means may be a means capable of notifying only one or a plurality of types of effects designated by the designation means, or means for surely notifying one or a plurality of types of effects designated by the designation means. There may be. Further, the notifying means may be a means for notifying one or more types of effects specified by the specifying means. Further, the notifying means may be a means for notifying only a part of one or a plurality of types of effects specified by the specifying means, or a means for notifying all.

Further, “providing an instruction means (for example, the operation key unit 190) capable of instructing at least an effect to be executed from the one or a plurality of kinds of effects designated by the designation means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the effect instructed by the instruction means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, the player may be able to execute a desired effect.

  Here, the instruction means may be a means capable of instructing by the player an effect to be executed from one or more types of effects designated by the designation means, or one or more types of designation designated by the designation means. It may be a means capable of instructing only the effect to be executed from the effect by the player. Further, the instruction means may be a means capable of instructing by the player about effects other than one or a plurality of types of effects specified by the specifying means.

  Further, the effect means may be a means capable of executing only the effect instructed by the instruction means, or a means for surely executing the effect instructed by the instruction means. The effect means may be a means capable of executing an effect other than the effect instructed by the instruction means.

Further, “a generation unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 of the first sub-control unit 400) capable of generating at least the conversion information (for example, password, two-dimensional code, etc.) from the second information stored in the second storage unit. CPU 404),
An output means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of outputting at least the conversion information generated by the generating means (for example, displayed on a password issuing screen as shown in FIG. 12 (e));
A game table characterized by comprising: ]
Also explained.

  According to this, when the player can acquire conversion information such as a password when moving the gaming table, for example, and can have a profit that can cause the same effect to be executed on another gaming table. There is.

  Here, the generation unit may be a unit capable of generating only conversion information from the second information stored in the second storage unit, or the second unit stored in the second storage unit. It may be a means for surely generating conversion information from information. Further, the generation unit may be a unit capable of generating conversion information from the second information stored in the second storage unit and one or more types of information other than the second information. .

  The output unit may be a unit that can output only the conversion information generated by the generation unit, or may be a unit that always outputs the conversion information generated by the generation unit. The output unit may be a unit capable of outputting information different from the conversion information generated by the generation unit.

Further, “when the conversion information is output by the output means, information clear means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that can clear at least the second information stored in the second storage means. CPU 404)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When a player enters a password and logs in, advantageous memory information that increases the types of effects that can be executed is stored, but the player moves from the pachinko machine to another pachinko machine. When the game is performed, advantageous memory information remains in the pachinko machine that has been playing until now. Then, after that, other players who try to play with the pachinko machine may have fewer executable performances with their own passwords. In such a situation, other players Does not bother to enter his password and play. For this reason, the pachinko machine that attempts to increase or change the types of effects that can be executed by performing many games is impaired, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  According to the present invention, when conversion information such as a password is output, such advantageous storage information is cleared, so that it is attempted to increase the types of effects that can be executed by performing many games. There is a case where a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed without impairing the game performance of the pachinko machine.

  Here, when the conversion information is output by the output means, the information clear means may be capable of clearing only the second information stored in the second storage means, or by the output means. When the conversion information is output, the second information stored in the second storage unit may be necessarily cleared.

Further, “the second information is information including at least numerical information (for example, the acquired value shown in FIG. 10),
The second information updating unit updates at least the numerical information when an update condition (for example, start of symbol variation, occurrence of reach or super reach, start of big hit, occurrence of event such as entry into probability change state) is satisfied. Possible means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, for example, the player may be motivated to increase or change the executable performance by increasing the acquired value due to the occurrence of an event.

  Here, the second information may be information consisting only of numerical information, or information that necessarily includes numerical information. The second information may be information further including information other than numerical information.

  In addition, the second information updating unit may be capable of updating only the numerical information when the update condition is satisfied, or may update the numerical information without fail when the update condition is satisfied. The second information updating means may be capable of further updating information other than numerical information when the update condition is satisfied.

In addition, “the second information includes a game history (for example, the number of times of special symbol fluctuation, the number of times of reach production, the number of times of execution of a predetermined super reach production, the number of jackpots, the number of times that the probability changed state, the number of consecutive resorts, etc. )
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, for example, by accumulating the game history, the player may be motivated to increase or change the executable effects.

  Here, the second information may be information including only the game history, or may be information including the game history. The second information may be information further including information other than the game history.

In addition, “the first information includes a game history (for example, the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the number of times of reach production, the number of times of execution of a predetermined super reach production, the number of jackpots, the number of times that the probability change state has occurred, the number of consecutive resorts, etc. )
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, for example, by accumulating the game history, the player may be motivated to increase or change the executable effects.

  Here, the first information may be information including only a game history, or information including a game history. The first information may be information further including information other than the game history.

In addition, a “real-time clock (for example, RTC 438 in the first sub-control unit 400) is provided,
The first information is information including at least date and time information obtained from the real-time clock (for example, first release information indicating that the month is February obtained from the RTC 438 shown in FIG. 14B). Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, depending on the number of elapsed days, the elapsed time, or the current month and day, the executable performance can be increased or changed, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  Here, the first information may be information including only date / time information obtained from the real-time clock, or may be information that always includes date / time information obtained from the real-time clock. The first information may be information further including information other than the date / time information obtained from the real-time clock.

Further, “the second information is information including at least mission achievement status information (for example, information shown in the mission achievement status table shown in FIG. 21B),
The mission achievement status information is information representing the achievement status of each of one or more types of missions.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, depending on the achievement status of the mission, the executable performance can be increased or changed, the willingness to achieve the mission can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the second information may be information including only mission achievement status information, or information that always includes mission achievement status information. The second information may be information further including information other than mission achievement status information.

Further, “the first information is information including at least the mission achievement status information (for example, information shown in the mission achievement status table shown in FIG. 21B).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this, depending on the achievement status of the mission, the executable performance can be increased or changed, the willingness to achieve the mission can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the first information may be information including only mission achievement status information, or information that always includes mission achievement status information. The first information may be information further including information other than mission achievement status information.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means (for example, operation key unit 190);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400);
A game machine equipped with
The storage means is means capable of storing at least first information (for example, first release information indicating that it is February as shown in FIG. 14B),
The storage means is means capable of storing at least second information (for example, second release information indicating level C as shown in FIG. 14B),
The first information is information based on first input information,
The second information is information based on second input information,
The first input information is information (for example, a signal indicating a time measurement result) output from a real-time clock (for example, RTC 438 in the first sub-control unit 400),
The second input information is information (for example, a password, a two-dimensional code, etc.) input by operating the operating means,
The display means displays according to the information stored in the storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14B, “Song A” according to the first release information indicating that it is February. "Character A", "Character B", and "Character C" are selected in accordance with the display of the music list ML displayed as selectable music for "" and "Song B" and the second release information indicating the level C. (Display of character list CL displayed as a possible character image)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the storage means may always store the first information, or may store only the first information.

  In addition, the storage unit may always store the second information, or may store only the second information.

  The first information may be information that is not based on the second input information.

  The second information may be information that is not based on the first input information.

  The display means may always execute display according to the information stored in the storage means, or may only execute display according to the information stored in the storage means. May be.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A game that shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on the establishment of the first condition is a specific symbol Control means;
Individual information storage means for storing predetermined individual information;
Individual information updating means for updating individual information stored in the individual information storage means based on the establishment of the second condition;
Individual information identification information generating means for generating individual information identification information based on the individual information stored in the individual information storage means based on the establishment of the third condition;
Individual information identification information notifying means for notifying the individual information identification information;
Individual information identification information input means capable of inputting the individual information identification information or information equivalent thereto,
A game machine equipped with
The individual information storage means stores the individual information corresponding to the individual information identification information based on the individual information identification information input to the individual information identification information input means,
Based on the individual information stored in the individual information storage means, a game action control means for executing a specific game action different from a state in which the individual information is not stored in the individual information storage means;
With
The individual information storage means is capable of storing the individual information based on input of the individual information identification information generated by the individual information identification information generation means in another model having different specifications or information equivalent thereto. To play.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second condition includes a plurality of task achievement conditions different from each other, and the individual information includes task achievement condition progress information indicating an achievement status of the plurality of task achievement conditions,
The individual information update means updates the task achievement condition progress information based on the establishment of the conditions of the plurality of task achievement conditions,
A privilege granting means for granting a player a predetermined privilege from among a plurality of privileges predetermined corresponding to each task achievement condition based on the task achievement condition progress information;
A game table, wherein at least one of the plurality of task achievement conditions is the same as that of another model having a different specification.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The second condition includes a plurality of task achievement conditions different from each other, and the individual information includes task achievement condition progress information indicating an achievement status of the plurality of task achievement conditions,
The individual information update means updates the task achievement condition progress information based on the establishment of the conditions of the plurality of task achievement conditions,
A privilege granting means for granting a player a predetermined privilege from among a plurality of privileges predetermined corresponding to each task achievement condition based on the task achievement condition progress information;
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the plurality of task achievement conditions is a condition that differs from other models having different specifications, and that the achievement difficulty level of the condition is substantially equal.

(Appendix 4)
At least one of the plurality of task achievement conditions includes a specific task achievement condition corresponding to one of the plurality of task achievement conditions set for other models having different specifications, and one of the games A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the achievement of the specific task achievement condition in the table, the task achievement condition in the other gaming machine in a corresponding relationship is also achieved.

(Appendix 5)
A game machine that shifts a control state from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific symbol. There,
Individual setting information storage means for storing predetermined individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means for updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Specific operation means for executing a specific operation based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Conversion information generating means for generating conversion information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format;
Individual source information acquisition means for acquiring individual source information representing individual setting information based on the conversion information;
With
The individual setting information storage means is an individual setting based on conversion information generated in the same type of gaming machine in which the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquiring means is the same type as the type of the gaming machine in the design stage. In the case of information representing information, the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored, and the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means is different from the type of the game machine in the design stage. A gaming table that stores individual setting information based on acquired individual source information even when the information represents individual setting information based on conversion information generated in a different kind of gaming table .

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The individual setting information storage means stores information including task achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of predetermined tasks in the game as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task,
The specific operation means performs a specific operation that is permitted to be executed when a predetermined task is achieved;
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the plurality of tasks has a common task achievement condition with a task in the different kind of gaming machine.

(Appendix 7)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The individual setting information storage means stores information including task achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of predetermined tasks in the game as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task,
The specific operation means performs a specific operation that is permitted to be executed when a predetermined task is achieved;
A game machine, wherein at least one of the plurality of tasks has a task achievement difficulty level similar to that of the different kind of game machine, although the task achievement conditions are different.

(Appendix 8)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The individual setting information storage means stores information including task achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of predetermined tasks in the game as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task,
The specific operation means performs a specific operation that is permitted to be executed when a predetermined task is achieved;
A gaming table, wherein at least one of the plurality of tasks cannot be achieved unless a predetermined task in the different kind of gaming table is achieved.

(Appendix 9)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The individual setting information storage means stores information including task achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of predetermined tasks in the game as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the task achievement status information based on the achievement of the task,
The specific operation means performs a specific operation that is permitted to be executed when a predetermined task is achieved;
If at least one task among the plurality of tasks achieves a predetermined task achievement condition in the different kind of game machine, it is achieved even if the task achievement condition in the game machine is not satisfied A game table that features
(Appendix 10)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The individual setting information storage means stores, as the individual setting information, information including point total information that represents a total of points given based on achievement of a task, which is predetermined for each task. And
The individual setting information update means updates the point accumulated information based on the achievement of the task,
The game machine characterized in that the specific operation means executes a specific operation in accordance with the total number of points given.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming platform that shifts a control state from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific symbol aspect Because
This game machine is a pachinko machine,
Individual setting information storage means for storing predetermined individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means for updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Conversion information generating means for generating conversion information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format;
Individual source information acquisition means for acquiring individual source information representing individual setting information based on the conversion information;
With
The individual setting information storage means is based on the acquired individual element information when the individual element information acquired by the individual element information acquisition means is information representing the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the pachinko machine. The individual setting information is stored, and the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means represents the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the slot machine having a different type of game machine different from the game machine. Even if it is information, the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored,
The individual setting information storage means is capable of storing information including mission achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of missions as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the mission achievement status information based on the achievement of the mission,
When a predetermined mission effect is achieved, execution of a specific operation by the specific operation means is permitted,
The mission achievement condition of the first mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is the same as the mission achievement condition in the slot machine,
The mission achievement condition of the second mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is different from the mission achievement condition in the slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming platform that shifts a control state from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific symbol aspect Because
This game machine is a slot machine,
Individual setting information storage means for storing predetermined individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means for updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Conversion information generating means for generating conversion information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format;
Individual source information acquisition means for acquiring individual source information representing individual setting information based on the conversion information;
With
The individual setting information storage means is based on the acquired individual element information when the individual element information acquired by the individual element information acquisition means is information representing the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the slot machine. In addition to storing individual setting information, the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means represents individual setting information based on conversion information generated in a pachinko machine having a different type of game machine from the game machine. Even if it is information, the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored,
The individual setting information storage means is capable of storing information including mission achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of missions as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the mission achievement status information based on the achievement of the mission,
When a predetermined mission effect is achieved, execution of a specific operation by the specific operation means is permitted,
The mission achievement condition of the first mission presentation among the plurality of mission presentations is the same as the mission achievement condition in the pachinko machine,
The mission achievement condition of the second mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is different from the mission achievement condition in the pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the plurality of missions cannot be achieved unless a predetermined mission in the different kind of gaming machine is achieved.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
If at least one mission among the plurality of missions achieves a predetermined mission achievement condition in the different kind of game machine, it is achieved even if the mission achievement condition in the game machine is not satisfied. A game table that features

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
The individual setting information storage means stores, as the individual setting information, information including point total information that represents a total of points given based on completion of the mission, which is predetermined for each mission. And
The individual setting information update means updates the point accumulated information based on the achievement of the mission,
The game machine characterized in that the specific operation means executes a specific operation in accordance with the total number of points given.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming platform that shifts a control state from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific symbol aspect Because
This game machine is a pachinko machine,
Individual setting information storage means for storing predetermined individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means for updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Conversion information generating means for generating conversion information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format;
Individual source information acquisition means for acquiring individual source information representing individual setting information based on the conversion information;
With
The individual setting information storage means is based on the acquired individual element information when the individual element information acquired by the individual element information acquisition means is information representing the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the pachinko machine. The individual setting information is stored, and the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means represents the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the slot machine having a different type of game machine different from the game machine. Even if it is information, the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored,
The individual setting information storage means is capable of storing information including mission achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of missions as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the mission achievement status information based on the achievement of the mission,
When a predetermined mission effect is achieved, execution of a specific operation by the specific operation means is permitted,
The mission achievement condition of the first mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is the same as the mission achievement condition in the slot machine,
The mission achievement condition of the second mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is different from the mission achievement condition in the slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
A gaming platform that shifts a control state from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state having a higher advantage than the normal gaming state when the symbol derived after the symbol variation display based on establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific symbol aspect Because
This game machine is a slot machine,
Individual setting information storage means for storing predetermined individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means for updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation based on the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Conversion information generating means for generating conversion information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a predetermined format;
Individual source information acquisition means for acquiring individual source information representing individual setting information based on the conversion information;
With
The individual setting information storage means is based on the acquired individual element information when the individual element information acquired by the individual element information acquisition means is information representing the individual setting information based on the conversion information generated in the slot machine. In addition to storing individual setting information, the individual source information acquired by the individual source information acquisition means represents individual setting information based on conversion information generated in a pachinko machine having a different type of game machine from the game machine. Even if it is information, the personal setting information based on the acquired individual source information is stored,
The individual setting information storage means is capable of storing information including mission achievement status information representing the achievement status of each of a plurality of missions as the individual setting information,
The individual setting information update means updates the mission achievement status information based on the achievement of the mission,
When a predetermined mission effect is achieved, execution of a specific operation by the specific operation means is permitted,
The mission achievement condition of the first mission presentation among the plurality of mission presentations is the same as the mission achievement condition in the pachinko machine,
The mission achievement condition of the second mission effect among the plurality of mission effects is different from the mission achievement condition in the pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game stand according to appendix 16 or 17,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the plurality of missions cannot be achieved unless a predetermined mission in the different kind of gaming machine is achieved.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to appendix 16 or 17,
If at least one mission among the plurality of missions achieves a predetermined mission achievement condition in the different kind of game machine, it is achieved even if the mission achievement condition in the game machine is not satisfied. A game table that features

(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to appendix 16 or 17,
The individual setting information storage means stores, as the individual setting information, information including point total information that represents a total of points given based on completion of the mission, which is predetermined for each mission. And
The individual setting information update means updates the point accumulated information based on the achievement of the mission,
The game machine characterized in that the specific operation means executes a specific operation in accordance with the total number of points given.

(Appendix 21)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
First converted information generating means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The specific operation means is the individual setting information acquired from the second converted information obtained by converting the first converted information generated in the pachinko machine having a jackpot probability different from that of the pachinko machine into the second format. Is a table that can execute the specific operation when stored in the individual setting information storage means.

(Appendix 22)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
First converted information generating means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The individual setting information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The individual setting information updating means is capable of updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The specific operation means acquires the first converted information generated in the pachinko machine having at least a jackpot probability different from the pachinko machine from the second converted information converted into the second format, and has a predetermined mission. When the individual setting information including the mission achievement status information indicating that the achievement has been achieved is stored in the individual setting information storage means, the specific operation can be executed,
The achievement condition of the predetermined mission is common among pachinko machines having at least different jackpot probabilities.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
First converted information generating means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The individual setting information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The individual setting information updating means is capable of updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The specific operation means acquires the first converted information generated in the pachinko machine having at least a jackpot probability different from the pachinko machine from the second converted information converted into the second format, and has a predetermined mission. When the individual setting information including the mission achievement status information indicating that the achievement has been achieved is stored in the individual setting information storage means, the specific operation can be executed,
The achievement condition of the predetermined mission differs between pachinko machines having different jackpot probabilities at least.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 23,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the pachinko machine having at least different jackpot probabilities is a pachinko machine that has different game jacks even if the positions of a plurality of game nails arranged on the board are the same.

(Appendix 25)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Converted information generation means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The specific operation means is acquired from the second converted information obtained by converting the first converted information generated in the slot machine having at least different winning probability in the specific role from the slot machine into the second format. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific operation can be executed when individual setting information is stored in the individual setting information storage means.

(Appendix 26)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Converted information generation means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The individual setting information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The individual setting information updating means is capable of updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The specific operation means acquires from the second converted information converted into the second format the first converted information generated in the slot machine at least the winning probability in the specific role different from the slot machine, And when the individual setting information including the mission achievement status information indicating that a predetermined mission has been achieved is stored in the individual setting information storage means, the specific operation can be executed,
The achievement condition of the predetermined mission is common among slot machines having at least different winning probabilities in the specific role.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is capable of transitioning from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
Individual setting information storage means capable of storing individual setting information;
Individual setting information updating means capable of updating individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means;
Converted information generation means capable of generating first converted information obtained by converting the individual setting information stored in the individual setting information storage means into a first format;
Second converted information receiving means capable of receiving the second converted information;
Individual setting information acquisition means capable of acquiring individual setting information from the received second converted information;
A specific operation means capable of executing a specific operation,
The second converted information consists of information obtained by converting the first converted information into a second format,
The individual setting information storage means stores the individual setting information acquired by the individual setting information acquisition means,
The individual setting information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The individual setting information updating means is capable of updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The specific operation means acquires from the second converted information converted into the second format the first converted information generated in the slot machine at least the winning probability in the specific role different from the slot machine, And when the individual setting information including the mission achievement status information indicating that a predetermined mission has been achieved is stored in the individual setting information storage means, the specific operation can be executed,
The achievement condition of the predetermined mission is different between slot machines having different winning probabilities in the specific role at least.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 25 to 27,
The slot machine having at least different winning probabilities for the specific combination is a slot machine that is different if the winning probabilities for the specific combination are different even if the specific symbols arranged on the reel are the same. To play.

(Appendix 29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 28,
The game machine is characterized in that the first format and the second format are the same format.

(Appendix 30)
A game machine that can start a big hit with the first probability,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as “the pachinko machine”),
Information storage means capable of storing at least history information;
Information updating means capable of at least updating the history information;
Information conversion means capable of generating first information obtained by converting the history information into a first format;
Information receiving means capable of receiving second information obtained by converting the history information into a second format;
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the history information from the second information;
An operation execution means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of operations;
With
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The information storage means is capable of storing at least the history information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The history information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The information update means is capable of at least updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The operation execution means is capable of executing the first operation when first history information is stored in the information storage means,
The first history information may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that the first mission has been achieved in the pachinko machine, or a pachinko that can start a big hit with a second probability. It may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that the second mission has been achieved on the machine (hereinafter referred to as “other pachinko machine”),
The second probability is a different probability from the first probability;
The achievement condition of the second mission is different from the achievement condition of the first mission.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation,
The operation execution means is capable of executing the second operation when second history information is stored in the information storage means,
The second history information may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that a third mission has been achieved in the pachinko machine, or the third mission in the other pachinko machine. It may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that has been achieved,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The other pachinko machine is not mounted on the pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
It is a gaming machine that can win a bonus role with the first probability,
The game table is a slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “the slot machine”),
Information storage means capable of storing at least history information;
Information updating means capable of at least updating the history information;
Information conversion means capable of generating first information obtained by converting the history information into a first format;
Information receiving means capable of receiving second information obtained by converting the history information into a second format;
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the history information from the second information;
An operation execution means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of operations;
With
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The information storage means is capable of storing at least the history information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The history information includes mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The information update means is capable of at least updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The operation execution means is capable of executing the first operation when first history information is stored in the information storage means,
The first history information may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that the first mission has been achieved in the slot machine, or a slot that can be won as a bonus combination with a second probability. It may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that the second mission has been achieved in the machine (hereinafter referred to as “other slot machine”),
The second probability is a different probability from the first probability;
The achievement condition of the second mission is different from the achievement condition of the first mission.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation,
The operation execution means is capable of executing the second operation when second history information is stored in the information storage means,
The second history information may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that a third mission has been achieved in the slot machine, or the third mission in the other slot machine. It may be history information including mission achievement status information indicating that has been achieved,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The game stand according to appendix 33 or 34,
The other slot machine is not mounted on the slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
It is a gaming machine that can win a jackpot with the first probability,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as “the pachinko machine”),
Information storage means capable of storing at least history information;
Information updating means capable of at least updating the history information;
Information conversion means capable of generating first information obtained by converting the history information into a first format;
Information receiving means capable of receiving second information obtained by converting the history information into a second format;
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the history information from the second information;
An operation execution means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of operations;
With
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The information storage means is means capable of storing at least the history information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The history information is information including mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The information update means is means capable of at least updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The operation execution means is means capable of executing the first operation when the first mission achievement status information of the mission achievement status information is updated to information representing a first mission result.
The information indicating the result of the first mission includes information indicating that the first mission has been achieved in the pachinko machine, and a pachinko machine that can win a jackpot with a second probability (hereinafter referred to as “other pachinko machines”). Information including at least one of the information indicating that the second mission has been accomplished in
The second probability is a different probability from the first probability;
The achievement condition of the second mission is different from the achievement condition of the first mission.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to appendix 36,
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation,
The operation execution means is means capable of executing the second operation when the second mission achievement status information of the mission achievement status information is updated to information representing a second mission result.
The information indicating the second mission result is information indicating that the third mission has been achieved in the pachinko machine, and information indicating that the third mission has been achieved in the other pachinko machine. Information including at least one of the information,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to appendix 36 or 37,
The other pachinko machine is not mounted on the pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
It is a gaming machine that can win a bonus role with the first probability,
The game table is a slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “the slot machine”),
Information storage means capable of storing at least history information;
Information updating means capable of at least updating the history information;
Information conversion means capable of generating first information obtained by converting the history information into a first format;
Information receiving means capable of receiving second information obtained by converting the history information into a second format;
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring the history information from the second information;
An operation execution means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of operations;
With
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The information storage means is means capable of storing at least the history information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The history information is information including mission achievement status information indicating a mission achievement status,
The information update means is means capable of at least updating the mission achievement status information when the mission is achieved,
The operation execution means is means capable of executing the first operation when the first mission achievement status information of the mission achievement status information is updated to information representing a first mission result.
The information indicating the first mission result includes information indicating that the first mission has been achieved in the slot machine, and a slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “others” that can win a bonus combination with a second probability. It is information including information on at least one of information indicating that the second mission has been achieved in the slot machine.)
The second probability is a different probability from the first probability;
The achievement condition of the second mission is different from the achievement condition of the first mission.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation,
The operation execution means is means capable of executing the second operation when the second mission achievement status information of the mission achievement status information is updated to information representing a second mission result.
The information indicating the second mission result includes information indicating that the third mission has been achieved in the slot machine, and information indicating that the third mission has been achieved in the other slot machine. Information including at least one of the information,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to appendix 39 or 40,
The other slot machine is not mounted on the slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
Production notification means for performing notification including production display for producing a game;
Individual information input means capable of inputting individual information;
Individual information storage means for storing the individual information input by the individual information input means;
Production control means for performing control to cause the production notification means to execute a predetermined production according to the individual information stored in the individual information storage means;
A game control means for inputting a predetermined activation signal, and starting game control based on the input of the predetermined activation signal;
An electrical system abnormality signal output means for outputting an electrical system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electrical system for operating the game control means;
Game control information storage means for storing information related to game control when the electrical system abnormality signal is output;
Based on the fact that the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means after the electrical system abnormality signal is output, the game control information storage means is in a control state when the electrical system abnormality signal is output. Control state return means for returning based on information relating to game control stored in the game table,
The effect control means performs control to execute the effect according to the first aspect, using the effect notification means, based on the individual information stored in the individual information storage means,
The control state return means outputs the electrical system abnormality signal in a state in which the effect according to the first aspect is being executed by the effect notification means, and then the predetermined activation signal is input to the game control means. In this case, the effect according to the first aspect, which has been executed by the effect notification means until the electrical system abnormality signal is output, is switched to the effect according to the second aspect different from the first aspect. A game table characterized by letting it.

(Appendix 43)
In the game stand described in Appendix 42,
The individual information includes individual setting information indicating an element set by the player from a plurality of elements,
The effect control means selects a specific effect previously associated with the individual setting information included in the individual information stored in the individual information storage means from a plurality of effects, and the first aspect A game stand characterized in that the specific effect is executed as an effect by the game.

(Appendix 44)
In the game stand according to appendix 42 or 43,
When the individual information is stored in the individual information storage unit, the production control unit determines whether or not to produce the production by lottery, and performs the production according to the first mode with a first probability. The game table is characterized in that the performance according to the second aspect is performed with a second probability higher than the first probability.

(Appendix 45)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 42 to 44,
The stage according to the second aspect is a stage that is performed when the individual information is not stored in the individual information storage means.

(Appendix 46)
In the game stand in any one of Claims 42-45,
In the case where the individual information is stored in the individual information storage means, an individual information update means for updating the individual information based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the progress of the game,
The game machine characterized in that the effect control means changes the effect according to the first aspect based on the individual information constantly updated by the individual information update means.

(Appendix 47)
In the game stand in any one of Claims 42-46,
A code information generating unit configured to generate code information based on the individual information stored in the individual information storage unit based on a predetermined operation performed by the player;
The effect control means notifies the code information using the effect notification means based on the fact that the code information generation means generates the code information, and the electric system abnormality signal is output during the execution of the notification. When the activation signal is output and then the activation signal is input, the notification of the code information that has been performed using the effect notification unit until the electric system abnormality signal is output is not to be notified to the effect notification unit. A game table that features

(Appendix 48)
At least one of a plurality of effects, a direction means capable of executing,
An input means that allows a player to enter at least a password;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The production means can execute at least the first production in the first period,
The probability that the first performance is executed in the first period is the first probability,
The probability that the first performance is executed in the second period is the second probability,
The first probability is a probability that is at least different from the second probability;
The first period is a period after the password is input to the input means,
The second period is a period in which the password is not input to the input unit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
The production means is capable of at least starting to execute the first production in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to appendix 48 or 49,
The second period is a period after the occurrence of power interruption in the first period,
The second period is a period before the password is input to the input means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 48 to 50,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The production means is capable of starting to execute at least the second production in the second period,
The probability that the second performance is executed in the first period is a third probability,
The probability that the second performance is executed in the second period is a fourth probability,
The third probability is a probability that is at least different from the fourth probability.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 48 to 51,
The first probability is a probability that is at least higher than the second probability;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 48 to 52,
The second probability is zero;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 51 to 53, wherein
The third probability is zero,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 48 to 54,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 48 to 54,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
A game machine equipped with a production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
First storage means capable of storing at least first information;
First information updating means capable of at least updating the first information stored in the first storage means;
An input means capable of inputting conversion information;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring at least second information from the input conversion information;
Second storage means capable of storing at least the second information acquired by the acquisition means;
Second information update means capable of at least updating the second information stored in the second storage means;
Corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information, designation means capable of designating one or a plurality of types of effects among the plurality of types of effects;
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one or more kinds of effects designated by the designation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to appendix 57,
Provided with an informing means capable of informing at least the one or more types of effects designated by the designation means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The game stand according to appendix 57 or 58,
Comprising instruction means capable of instructing by the player an effect to be executed at least from the one or more types of effects specified by the specifying means
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the effect instructed by the instruction means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 59,
Generation means capable of generating the conversion information from the second information stored at least in the second storage means;
Output means capable of outputting at least the conversion information generated by the generation means;
A game table characterized by comprising:

(Appendix 61)
The gaming machine according to attachment 60, wherein
When the conversion information is output by the output means, the information storage means is provided that can clear at least the second information stored in the second storage means,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 57 to 61,
The second information is information including at least numerical information,
The second information update means is means capable of updating at least the numerical information when an update condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 62,
The second information is information including at least a game history.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 63, wherein
The first information is information including at least a game history.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 64,
With a real time clock,
The first information is information including at least date and time information obtained from the real-time clock.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 65,
The second information is information including at least mission achievement status information,
The mission achievement status information is information representing the achievement status of each of one or more types of missions.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
A gaming machine according to appendix 66,
The first information is information including at least the mission achievement status information.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 67,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 57 to 67,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 161 Original mode selection switch 190 Operation key unit 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st special figure start port 232 2nd special view start port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable prize opening 2341 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 438 RTC
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 610 Menu window 620 Customization guide C1, C2 Two-dimensional code 900 Slot machine S Server M Mobile phone terminal N Communication network M1 First storage area M2 Second storage area

Claims (14)

A game machine equipped with a production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
First storage means capable of storing at least first information;
First information updating means capable of at least updating the first information stored in the first storage means;
An input means capable of inputting conversion information;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring at least second information from the input conversion information;
Second storage means capable of storing at least the second information acquired by the acquisition means;
Second information update means capable of at least updating the second information stored in the second storage means;
Corresponding to at least one of the first information and the second information, designation means capable of designating one or a plurality of types of effects among the plurality of types of effects;
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one or more kinds of effects designated by the designation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
Provided with an informing means capable of informing at least the one or more types of effects designated by the designation means;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
An instruction means capable of instructing at least an effect to be executed by the player from the one or more kinds of effects designated by the designation means;
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the effect instructed by the instruction means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
Generating means capable of generating at least the conversion information from the second information stored in the second storage means;
Output means capable of outputting at least the conversion information generated by the generation means;
A game table characterized by comprising: The game table according to claim 4,
When the conversion information is output by the output means, the information clear means capable of at least clearing the second information stored in the second storage means,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The second information is information including at least numerical information,
The second information update means is means capable of at least updating the numerical information when an update condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The second information is information including at least a game history.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The first information is information including at least a game history.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
With a real time clock,
The first information is information including at least date and time information obtained from the real-time clock.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The second information is information including at least mission achievement status information,
The mission achievement status information is information representing the achievement status of each of one or more types of missions.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10,
The first information is information including at least the mission achievement status information.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. Operating means;
Display means;
Storage means;
A game machine equipped with
The storage means is means capable of storing at least first information;
The storage means is means capable of storing at least second information,
The first information is information based on first input information,
The second information is information based on second input information,
The first input information is information output from a real-time clock,
The second input information is information input by operation of the operation means,
The display means is means capable of executing at least display according to information stored in the storage means.
A game stand characterized by that.